BID ENVELOPE MSCAA PROJECT NO. 14-1386-02 NAME OF PROJECT: AIRFIELD MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FACILITY - CONSTRUCTION BIDS DUE:
03/06/2018
TIME: 2:00 PM Local Time
MEMPHIS SHELBY COUNTY AIRPORT AUTHORITY (MSCAA) STAFF SERVICES DIVISION MEMPHIS INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 4121 Runway Road, Suite B Memphis, TN 38118 (901) 922-8000 BIDDER IDENTIFICATION: Bidder
____________________________________________________________
Address
____________________________________________________________
TENNESSEE CONTRACTOR LICENSE INFORMATION: License Number
______________________________________________________
License Classification Applicable to Project ____________________________________ License Expiration Date ____________________________________________________ Dollar Limit
______________________________________________________
SUBCONTRACTORS (OR PRIME CONTRACTORS) TO BE USED ON THIS PROJECT IN THE BELOW LISTED CAPACITIES: Note: Where applicable, one contractor/subcontractor performing electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and masonry work must have its license number, applicable classification, expiration date and dollar limit on the BID ENVELOPE containing the BID PROPOSAL. Prime contractors who are to perform the electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning or masonry work MUST list themselves as “SelfPerform” in the Sub-contractor list below.
Sub-contractor List
License No.
Applicable Classification
Expiration Date
Dollar Limit
Electrical Plumbing Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Masonry BID ENVELOPE COMPLETE THIS FORM AND ATTACH IT TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE BID ENVELOPE. PLEASE REVIEW INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR BID PACKAGE DELIVERY AND FOR OTHER INFORMATION AND CONDITIONS. MSCAA RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO REJECT AND DISQUALIFY YOUR BID IF YOU, YOUR PARENT, SUBSIDIARY, AFFILIATE, OR PREDECESSOR IN INTEREST OR ANY OF YOUR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND/OR THEIR PARENTS, SUBSIDIARIES, AFFILIATES OR PREDECESSORS IN INTEREST HAVE PENDING LITIGATION OR CLAIMS WITH THE MSCAA.
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division/Section Code
Section Title
NON-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 0 00001 00007 00010 00015 00100 00200 00405 00410 00445 00490 00500 00605 00610 00630 00640 00765 00801 00802
Project Title Page Professional Seals Table of Contents List of Drawings Legal Notice to Bidders Instructions to Bidders/Proposers Proposal Proposal Guarantee Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements Addenda and Modifications Construction Contract Certificate of Secretary Performance Bond & Labor and Material Payment Bond Application for Payment Business Diversity Monthly Compliance Report Supplemental Provisions Airport Construction Safety Requirements Airport Security Requirements
General Provisions Section 10 Section 20 Section 30 Section 40 Section 50 Section 60 Section 70 Section 80 Section 90 Section 100 Section 105 Section 150
Definition of Terms Proposal Requirements and Conditions Award and Execution of Contract Scope of Work Control of Work Control of Materials Legal Regulations and Responsibility to Public Execution and Progress Measurement and Payment Contractor Quality Control Program Mobilization General Provisions Addendum
DIVISION 1 01100 01210 01230 01250
Summary of Work, Sequence of Construction & Liquidated Damages Allowances Alternates Amendment Procedure
ADDENDUM NO. 2
00010 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
DIVISION 1 (continued) 01310 01320 01321 01322 01325 01330 01351 01353 01455 01500 01581 01600 01630 01700 01720 01730 01741 01770 01771 01772 01773 01774 01775 01783 01784
Preconstruction Conference & Progress Meetings Schedules and Reports Construction Surveying Aerial Photographs Delays and Extension of Time Submittals Storage and Protection Radio Communications Quality Control and Quality Assurance Testing Programs Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Temporary Project Signage Product Requirements Product Substitution Procedures Field Engineering Project Record Documents Cutting and Patching Cleaning Contract Closeout Affidavit of Contractor Final Lien Waiver and Release: Prime Contractor Final Lien Waiver and Release: Subcontractor Contractor Warranty Form Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment Electrical Characteristics, Capacities, and Wiring Diagrams Manufacturer's Supervision
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 03 30 10 03 47 00 04 20 00 05 12 00 05 20 00 05 30 00 05 50 00 05 51 10 06 10 00 06 40 00 07 21 00 07 22 16 07 26 16 07 55 52 07 84 00 07 92 00 08 11 00 08 14 16 08 31 00 08 32 30 08 33 13
00010 Page 2
Concrete Work Site Cast Tilt-Up Concrete Unit Masonry Assemblies Structural Steel Steel Joists Metal Floor and Roof Deck Metal Fabrications Metal Pan Stairs Rough Carpentry Interior Architectural Woodwork Building Insulation Roof Insulation Below Grade Vapor Barrier Modified Bitumen Roofing Firestopping and Fire Resistive Joint Systems Joint Sealants Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Interior Access Doors and Panels Overhead Coiling Doors Overhead Coiling Counter Doors
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 08 36 00 08 41 13 08 71 00 08 80 00 09 29 00 09 51 50 09 65 00 09 65 10 09 65 13 09 70 50 09 82 00 09 90 00 10 11 00 10 21 13 10 22 25 10 50 10 10 56 13 10 75 16 10 90 00 11 14 13 11 40 00 11 41 20 12 48 13 12 59 00 14 45 00 14 60 00 21 05 00 21 05 48 21 10 00 21 31 12 21 31 15 22 05 00 22 05 29 22 07 00 22 11 16 22 11 19 22 13 16 22 13 19 22 15 13 22 34 00 22 40 00 22 68 00 23 05 00 23 05 29 23 05 48 23 05 93 23 07 00 23 07 19
Sectional Overhead Doors Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Door Hardware Glazing Gypsum Board Assemblies Wood Panel Ceilings Resilient Floor Tile Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Wall Base and Accessories Trowel Applied Flooring (TAF) Acoustical Insulation and Sealants Painting Visual Display Boards Toilet Compartments Retractable Wall Standard Steel Lockers Wire Rack Shelving Flagpoles Fixed Louvers Turnstiles Ice Machines Walk-In Coolers and Freezers Entrance Grille Computer Console Systems Vehicle Lifts Cranes Common Work Results for Fire Suppression Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Water Based Fire Protection Sprinkler System Pre-Action Fire Suppression Systems Detection/Sapphire Fire Suppression System Common Work Results for Plumbing Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Insulation Domestic Water Piping Domestic Water Piping Specialties Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties General Services Compressed Air Piping Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Plumbing Fixtures Lubrication Systems Common Work Results for HVAC Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Testing, Adjusting and Balancing HVAC Insulation HVAC Piping Insulation
ADDENDUM NO. 2
00010 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 23 09 00 23 09 10 23 11 13 23 11 23 23 21 13 23 21 16 23 21 23 23 23 00 23 25 00 23 31 13 23 33 00 23 34 23 23 34 35 23 36 00 23 38 13 23 42 00 23 51 00 23 52 16 23 55 33 23 57 00 23 64 00 23 73 15 23 73 39 23 81 23 23 82 19 26 01 00 26 05 00 26 05 26 26 05 36 26 05 48 26 09 43 26 24 00 26 24 50 26 32 13 26 36 00 26 41 13 26 51 00 27 05 26 27 05 28 27 05 29 27 05 36 27 05 44 27 11 00 27 13 00 27 13 13 27 13 23 27 15 13 27 15 23
00010 Page 4
Automatic Temperature Control System Adjustable Frequency AC Motor Controllers Fuel Systems – Diesel and Gasoline Natural Gas and Propane Piping Hydronic Piping Hydronic Piping Specialties Hydronic Pumps Refrigerant Piping and Specialties HVAC Water Treatment Ductwork Air Duct Accessories HVAC Power Ventilators Detail Vacuum System Air Outlets and Inlets Commercial Kitchen Hoods Vehicle Exhaust Removal System Flues and Stacks Boilers Fuel-Fired Unit Heaters Terminal Heat Transfer Units Air Cooled Water Chillers Air Handling Units Indoor Direct Fired Heating and Ventilating Units Precision Air Conditioners Fan Coil Units Electrical General Provisions Basic Material and Methods Grounding and Bonding Cable Trays Seismic Restraint Systems Lighting Control System Service and Distribution Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Emergency Generator System Service Entrance Automatic Transfer Switches Lightning Protection Lighting and Lighting Control Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Pathways for Communications Systems Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Cable Trays for Communications Systems Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling Communications Equipment Room Fittings Communication Systems Identification Communications Copper Backbone Cabling Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 28 05 13 28 13 00 28 23 00 28 31 00 31 11 00 31 22 00 31 25 00 31 31 16 31 66 00 32 11 23 32 11 36 32 12 16 32 13 13 32 16 00 32 17 23 32 31 13 32 90 00 32 90 02 33 11 00 33 31 00 33 39 00 33 41 00 33 49 00 41 34 23
Conductors and Cables for Electronic Security Access Control System Video Surveillance System Fire Alarm System Clearing and Grubbing Grading: Earthwork, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting Erosion Control Termite Control Rammed Aggregate Pier Foundation Systems Aggregate Base Courses Soil Cement Concrete Base Course Asphalt Paving Concrete Paving Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways Pavements Markings Chain-Link Fences and Gates Landscape Planting Sod Water System Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Sanitary Utility Sewerage Structures Storm Utility Drainage Piping Storm Drainage Structures Paint Booth
Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C
SWPPP Geotechnical Report MSCAA Design Guide
END OF SECTION 00010
ADDENDUM NO. 2
00010 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
This page left blank intentionally.
00010 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
LEGAL NOTICE Request for Bids MSCAA Project Number 14‐1386‐02 MSCAA Airfield Maintenance and Operations Support Facility Sealed bids for Airfield Maintenance and Operation Support Facility (14‐1386‐02) will be received by the Memphis‐Shelby County Airport Authority (Authority), Staff Services Division, 4121 Runway Road, Suite B, Memphis, TN 38118, until 2:00 PM local time on March 6, 2018. Bids will not be received at any other location. Within 30 minutes thereafter, the bids will be opened and publicly read at the Authority’s Project Center located at 4225 Airways Boulevard, Memphis, TN. The Bid Documents, including a description of the scope of work, the required response format, and additional instructions may be obtained on or after January 10, 2018 online at www.flymemphis.com . A Pre‐Bid Meeting will be held on January 25, 2018 at 2:00 PM local time at the Authority’s Project Center located at 4225 Airways Boulevard, Memphis, TN. Immediately following the meeting, a tour of the project site will be available. Attendance at the Pre‐Bid Meeting is strongly recommended. All Bidders are responsible for checking the Authority’s website up to the submission deadline for any updates, addenda or additional information. The successful Bidder must sign a contract with the Authority that includes Federal Aviation Administration provisions, if applicable, regarding the Buy American Preference, Foreign Trade Restriction, Davis‐Bacon, Affirmative Action, Debarment and Suspension, and Drug‐Free Workplace, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Each bid must be made by a contractor licensed in Tennessee and be accompanied by a 5% Bid Guarantee. The successful bidder must execute a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in the amount of 100% each of the Contract Price and meet the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) participation goal for this project, which is 27%. The Authority reserves the right to reject any or all responses to this Request for Bids in whole or in part; to waive any informalities, technicalities, or omissions related to this Request for Bids; and to reject responses on any other basis authorized by the Authority’s purchasing policies. The Authority is an equal opportunity employer and prohibits discrimination based on the grounds of age, race, sex, color, national origin, disability, marital status, military service, or sexual orientation in its hiring and employment practices and in the admission to, access to, or operation of its programs, services, and activities.
By order of: Scott A. Brockman, A.A.E. President and CEO Memphis‐Shelby County Airport Authority
ADDENDUM NO. 2
00100 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
00100 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02-07-18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
DIVISION 1 – SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES PART 1 1.01
GENERAL SUMMARY A.
To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely determined by the Owner prior to bidding, allow within the proposed Contract Sum the amounts described in this Section.
B.
Unless stated otherwise herein, all allowances are to be paid as Time and Materials Work per GP150.
C.
Related Work: 1. 2.
1.02
Documents affecting Work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, Division 0, Division 1 and other Sections of these Specifications. Other provisions concerning Allowances may be stated in other Sections of these Specifications.
SPECIFIC ALLOWANCES – The following cash allowances are included within this Contract A.
MLGW & AT&T Utility Allowance - The Contractor shall pay all utility connection fees as required by the project. This allowance shall be used at the sole discretion of the Program Manager. ($250,000)
B.
Interior Furnishings – Types and locations shall be determined as required by the project. This allowance shall be used at the sole discretion of the Program Manager. ($50,000)
C.
Racks and Shelving – Types and locations shall be determined as required by the project. This allowance shall be used at the sole discretion of the Program Manager. ($25,000)
END OF 01210
ADDENDUM NO. 2
01210 Page 1
02-07-18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
01210 Page 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 03 46 00 FORM LINERS FOR TILT-UP CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
Provide form liners as required for preparation of architectural tilt-up concrete.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 03 30 10 - Cast in Place Concrete: General Requirements.
B.
Section 03 47 00 - Tilt-Up Precast Concrete.
REFERENCES A.
American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 117 - Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B.
ASTM International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM D 256
2.
ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
3.
ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
4.
ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
5.
ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
6.
ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
7.
ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
8.
ASTM D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
9.
ASTM D 1525 - Standard Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 10.
1.5
ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness, Shore A; A Scale Test.
SUBMITTALS A.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.
Printed product data and installation guidelines for formliner system.
2.
Manufacturer's installation instructions, showing required preparation and installation procedures.
3.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.
Installation methods.
5.
Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
Shop Drawings: Submit formwork panel elevations, detailing the location of architectural concrete work, including but not limited to the following: 1.
Form tie locations, end locations and other special conditions, panel sizes, joint locations, joint widths, reveal and false-joint locations and dimensions, elevations, sections and details of assembly components, attachment details, and weather sealing; indicate locations, configurations, typical details, connections, expansion joints, large scale plans.
2.
Show sequence of installation.
3.
Show location of members, other items of work and related work of other Sections to be coordinated with work of this section.
4.
Submit detail drawings depicting proper installation and flashing techniques. Coordinate locations with those found on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Quality Assurance Submittals: Copies of test reports by independent laboratories verifying the performance of the system shall be submitted to the Architect upon request.
D.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12 inches (305 mm) by 12 inches (305 mm), maximum size 24 inches (610 mm) by 24 inches (610 mm), representing actual products, styles, colors, patterns, and textures.
E.
03 46 00 Page 2
1.
Formliner samples.
2.
Form release sample representing form release specified.
Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's standard warranty.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Single Source Requirements: Provide primary and secondary components required for installation of formliner systems shall be components of system recommended by single source.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience manufacturing similar products.
C.
Installer Qualifications:
D.
1.7
MSCAA 14-1386-02
1.
Experienced and competent in architectural concrete installation.
2.
If requested, submit a list of recently completed projects using similar materials.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1.
The mock-up shall demonstrate the full range of specified design options and workmanship to be expected in completed work.
2.
Locate mock-up on site in location as directed by Architect. Clean the sample panel installation using the same materials and tools as planned for the final construction.
3.
Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-up before start of work.
4.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, colors, styles, patterns, and textures are approved by Architect.
5.
Incorporate edges, reveal, and detail as indicated drawings.
6.
Show clean, pressure washed concrete surface.
7.
Modify mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
8.
Maintain Mock Up for comparison with finished work.
9.
Remove mock-up at the completion of the work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Materials shall be delivered to the location in unopened factory containers. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for damage and manufacturer informed of any discrepancies. Deficient materials shall not be used.
B.
Materials shall be stored in a protected location and safeguarded from damage.
C.
Store form liners covered and elevated off the exposed ground. Prolonged high or low temperatures will cause a permanent distortion and deterioration of physical properties.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
D.
Protect liquid materials from freezing temperatures and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Store covered, out of direct sunlight.
1.8
COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A.
Coordinate installation of form liner panel systems with related wall elements, including, windows, doors, louvers, ducts, signage, flashings, sealants, weather resistive barrier, sealant tapes and membranes, supporting wall framing and sheathing, surface mounted objects, etc. 1.
Coordinate with installation of flashing, coping and sealants to ensure that materials are installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Coordinate with installation of surface-mounted objects to ensure that watertight seal is provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Fitzgerald Formliners, which is located at: 1500 E. Chestnut Ave. ; Santa Ana, CA 92701; Toll Free Tel: 800-547-7760; Tel: 714-547-6710; Email: request info (
[email protected]); Web: www.formliners.com
B.
Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered, subject to compliance with specified requirements.
FORMLINERS A.
3.1
3.2
Basis-of-Design: Pattern 16938, GrayLastic Extended-Use Elastomeric Formliners: As manufactured by Fitzgerald Formliners. 1. Description: 100 percent pure urethane, mold bonded to 0.75 inch (19 mm) ACX plywood, up to 100 concrete pours. 2. Compliance: a. Shore A Hardness ASTM D 2240: 60-70. b. Cast Density: PCF 62-67. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: PLI 140-160.
EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin installation until substrates are within manufacturer's specified tolerances and have been prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, do not proceed with installation. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation immediately. Commencement of full installation represents acceptance of existing substrate conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
03 46 00 Page 4
Prepare, install, and finish in accordance with current release of manufacturer’s application ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 guidelines for the particular type of formliner used.
3.3
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions as applicable to each type of substrate required. Install in accordance with specified pattern and mortar.
C.
Tolerances: Dimensions of the finished panel, at the time of erection in the structure, shall conform to the tolerances for precast, non prestressed elements in ACI 117, unless otherwise specified by the Architect.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
B.
Cleaning: As recommended by manufacturer. Do not begin cleaning until mortar joints are properly cured. Allow a minimum of 24 to 72 hours. Soak mortar joints before applying cleaner. 1.
Thoroughly flush wall and are after cleaning.
2.
Clean adjacent materials and surfaces of all foreign materials resulting from the work of this Section.
Protection: 1.
Protect installed materials from water impinging on the visible surface, chinking, sealants joints, and from behind.
2.
Protect installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing, damaged, spilled materials, and continuous high humidity until they are fully dry. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 03 47 00 SITE-CAST TILT-UP CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to this section SUMMARY Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following. 1.
Site-cast tilt-up concrete panels.
B.
Related Work: All permanently exposed exterior vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces Shall conform to special requirements in this section, addition to the requirements of cast in place concrete. It is the intent to produce exposed concrete surfaces of uniform texture and color.
C.
Related sections: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the designated Sections: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for slab-on-grade design and construction and general requirements for concrete used in tilt-up panels. Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing to adjacent materials. .
Reference Standards: regulations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following standards and
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code – Steel. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel. ASTM A123/A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.
ASTM A706/A706M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. ASTM C78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for ReadyMixed Concrete. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. ASTM C293/C293M - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading). ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. ASTM C595/C595M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. ASTM C989/C989M - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. ASTM C1157/C1157M - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. ASTM C1697 - Standard Specification for Blended Supplementary Cementitious Materials. ACI 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. ACI 305 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. ACI 306 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. ACI 315 - Standard for Details and Detailing Concrete Reinforcement. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. ACI 551 - Guide to Tilt-Up Concrete Construction. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and CRSI Specifications for Placing Reinforcement. BSR/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. ASCE 37 – Design Loads on Structures During Construction. Tilt-Up Concrete Association Wind Bracing Guidelines (TCA). Tilt-Up Concrete Association Erection Safety Procedures Brochure (TCA).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: 1.
03 47 00 Page 2
Submit panel shop drawings and erection drawings detailing the Work of this Section including temporary bracing. Reinforcing bars shown on the project drawings do not allow for lifting and erection stresses. Shop drawings shall be stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project and responsible for their preparation. Include the following: ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
B.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Concrete mix designs for each mix specified.
b.
Mix design for structural grout for panel supports.
2.
Shop drawings shall provide a full description of forming system and techniques including form liner, flat form material, steel support system, ties, joints in both liner and panels and rustications. Submit a written description of proposed construction methods including; method of reinforcing steel placement and tying, method of concrete placement description of vibration techniques, method of assuring alignment of form, release and curing agents and sand blasting approach.
3.
Prepare shop drawings of each individual tilt up panel or cast in place surfaces receiving form liner or adjacent to form liner, showing layout of form liners and flat or full thickness surfaces. Indicate by mark each liner section showing top of liner and where it is cut or otherwise modified to show relationship to adjacent panels in order to insure continuity of pattern across joint between panels both horizontally and vertically.
Verification Samples for Exposed Finishes: Prior to construction of mock-up submit representative samples of exposed finishes for review. Samples be approximately 18 by 18 by 2 inches in size. 1. 2. 3.
1.4
a.
Quality Control Submittals: Product Data: For each product, including bond breakers, joint sealants, insulation, connection devices. Manufacturer’s Instructions: For manufactured items used, submit the manufacturer’s current recommended methods of installation, including relevant limitations and safety precautions. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports confirming physical characteristics of materials used in the performance of the Work of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Where those requirements conflict with this Specification, comply with the more stringent provisions.
B.
Qualifications for Tilt-Up Contractors: Contractor performing the tilt-up operations shall demonstrate the experience and expertise required to manage and execute the specified work. 1.
Provide certification that supervisor to be employed in the Work has been ACI certified, meeting Site Cast Tilt-Up Supervisor qualifications.
C.
Qualifications for Field Personnel: Contractor shall show evidence of competence in site cast tiltup concrete construction. Workers shall be proficient in production and erection operations and shall be under the direct supervision of qualified personnel.
D.
Qualifications for Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 3
02/07/18 E.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Job Mock-up Panel for Architectural Finishes: Prepare one panel using forming technique and construction methods to be used on the project for each level of finish shown on the drawings according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.5
Panels shall be a minimum of 4-feet by 8-feet. Incorporate edge and reveal conditions as detailed on the project drawings. For abraded or exposed colored concrete finishes: Utilize full range size and colors in aggregate. Utilize full range of color in grout. Match the degree of abrasion (e.g. sandblast, water-blast, retarder, acid etch, etc.) specified. For textured or architectural liner finishes: Utilize full range of texture as specified. Sample shall consist of section showing integration of both horizontal and vertical liner joints. For cast-in-brick or stone finishes: Utilize full range of color sampling for brick specified. Sample shall consist of one repaired brick in field of display. Maintain approved mock-up for comparison with finish work. Dispose of mock-up when project is completed or when directed by Architect.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.6
Job Conditions: Comply with the following: 1.
Do not construct formwork, place steel reinforcement or concrete, or erect panels during adverse weather unless approved measures are taken to prevent damage. During period of dry winds, low humidity and other conditions causing rapid drying, protect fresh concrete with an evaporation retardant (monomolecular film) or fine fog spray of water applied immediately after screeding and bull floating. Maintain protection until final finishing and curing compounds are applied.
2.
For cold weather conditions, adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Concrete materials and reinforcing steel, forms, fillers and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. If shelters are used, the type of fuel used for heating shall not weaken the concrete surface. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used.
3.
For hot weather conditions proper attention shall be given to concrete materials, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that may increase shrinkage and impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING A.
Thoroughly clean truck mixer drums, prior to batching architectural concrete. Load truck mixers at only the capacity which will ensure a uniform batch at the slump specified. In the event that mixing in truck mixer is not uniform the truck may either be rejected and not used on the project, unless allowed to mix only batches which will assure delivery of a uniform concrete of the specified slump.
B.
When batching concrete pull aggregate from different areas of bulk stock for each batch of concrete to
03 47 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 prevent effects of settlement showing up in finished concrete.
C.
Concrete shall be delivered at such a rate as will assure that only fresh concrete is used.
D.
Trucks containing finished concrete will be flagged or otherwise identified as special concrete trucks of a different structural concrete mix is being used on the project at the same time.
1.7 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate site cast tilt-up operations with Work of other trades in order that Work may be expedited and omissions and delays avoided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TILT-UP CONCRETE, GENERAL A.
2.2
Comply with ACI 301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. ADMIXTURES
A.
The following listed admixtures shall be used in all architectural concrete. The manufacturers shall submit recommendations for the method of dispensing the admixtures with particular attention to possible undesirable chemical reaction between products when mixed in concentrated form.
B.
Water-Reducing and/or Retarding Densifier (ASTM-C-494, Type A, Type D) as required. The manufacturer of the admixture shall submit in writing to the Architect, Engineer, and the Contractor special recommendations for quantities to be used under various temperature and job conditions to assure that the concrete can be maintained at a uniform consistency while in the mixer truck and sufficiently workable between lifts to prevent the occurrence of lift lines with reasonable vibration.
C.
Air Entraining (ASTM C-260) The manufacturer of the admixture shall submit in writing to the Architect, Engineer, and the Contractor special recommendation for quantities to ensure 5% air in all architectural concrete. Concrete shall not be accepted which varies 1%, plus or minus.
2.3
CONCRETE PROPORTIONING
A.
2.4
Mixes for Architectural Concrete shall be air-entrained mixes having a water-cement ratio not exceeding 5-1/4 gal. of water per sack of cement and a nominal (ultimate strength) strength of 3000 PSI at 28 days. Maximum slump of concrete as placed shall be 3”. Careful and constant consideration shall be given to the proportioning of the mix with the required percent of fines in the fine aggregate to be adjusted as required to produce a smooth finish.
PANEL MATERIALS A.
Form Liners: Refer to Section 03 46 00 – Form Liner for Tilt-up Concrete. 1. 2.
Forms shall contain blockouts required to provide openings detailed on Drawings. Coordinate openings with other trades. Panel boundary forms shall be rigidly constructed and well braced steel or wood forms, ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
3.
4. 5.
straight and with precise corners. Design to withstand stresses resulting from the casting process. Consideration should be given to exposed formed surfaces. Forming surfaces shall be smooth and clean prior to pouring of concrete. Forms shall be attached to the finished building slab using non-intrusive glues and/or adhesives wherever possible in lieu of nails and bolts to eliminate penetrations and blemishes. Repairs shall be approved by the Architect Panels may be stacked for ease of casting, in forms as specified above. When panels are stack cast, maintain a continuous sound and smooth casting to match the finish of the original casting surface. Bondbreaker shall be compatible with curing compound and other finishes, including paint, and floor finish or be completely removed according to the manufacturer’s cleaning instructions.
B.
Reveal Materials: Materials used for creating reveals or relief in the exterior face of the panel shall be of adequate strength to withstand construction traffic/loads without damage.
C.
Concrete Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Cementitious materials shall conform to ASTM C150, C595, C1157 or C1697. Portland cement shall be Type . Fly Ash shall be Type . GGBFS shall be Grade .. Fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard strong, and durable inert material, free of injurious amounts of deleterious substances, conforming to ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete and ASTM C330 for lightweight aggregate concrete. Concrete shall be a design mix approved by Architect. Mixing water shall be free of any acid, alkali, oil or organic material that may interfere with the setting of the cement. Concrete shall not contain air-entrainment admixtures. Admixtures shall be approved by Architect. Concrete shall be produced and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94.
D.
Quality of Concrete: Ready-mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days as indicated on the project drawings and as required for panel erection, or specified, and tested according to ASTM C39.
E.
Steel Reinforcement: 1. 2. 3. 4.
03 47 00 Page 6
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, or ASTM A706/A706M. For reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A706, which will be welded, furnish a report of the chemical analysis for each heat of the bars. Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185 or A497 based on type and location and shall be of the style shown on the project drawings. Welded wire reinforcement shall be supplied in flat sheets. Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A184. Chairs and Bolsters, Form Ties and: Use stainless steel legs for all supports devices. Select chair or bolster leg spacing to work with form liner so support is always on deepest area of liner. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 F.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Lifting Hardware: Lifting hardware, inserts, braces, and related embedded and attached items shall be manufactured specifically for site cast tilt-up construction. 1.
G.
Miscellaneous Metals: 1. 2.
H.
Randomly-Mixed Reinforcing Elements: The use of materials mixed with the concrete for reinforcement are commonly applicable for reduction of plastic shrinkage and thermal expansion/contraction. They shall not be used as flexural reinforcement in structural panels, unless approved by a licensed design professional and reviewed by the Architect. Consult the manufacturer’s literature for proper material quantities and application procedures.
Provide inserts, dowels, and other items to be cast in panels, including items required for erection and bracing. Steel that will be exposed to the exterior or damp environments in finished panels shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 to prevent corrosion or oxidation of the metal after fabrication.
Aggregates: Provide gap-graded aggregates: Course aggregates shall be limestone meeting ASTM C-33 size No. 57, 1” to No. 4 with the following gradation: Sieve Size
1-1/2”
100%
1”
95-100%
½”
25-60%
#4
0-10%
#8
0-5%
1.
Fine aggregate sand white sand with an F. M. of 2.00 to 2.20.
2.
Purchase all aggregate need for entire project at one time from one source and take delivery of all material needed for project at one time. Maintain all aggregate is same condition. Turn overall bulk stock periodically.
I.
Gray Cement: Purchase all cement from the same source.
J.
Supports for Steel Reinforcement: materials. 1.
2.5
Percent Passing
Supports may consist of metal, all-plastic and concrete
Concrete supports may only be used in situations where surface contact is not visible.
CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 7
02/07/18 A.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: 1.
Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I and I D, Class B. It is preferred that the curing compound/bondbreaker be the same product or compatible, and that only one manufacturer’s product is used.
2.
Concrete Curing of Casting Beds: Concrete in and around those areas to be used for casting shall be cured after finishing and as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not so late that the liquid curing compoundwill be absorbed into the concrete. The cure and/or bondbreaking compound should be applied at the manufacturer’s recommended coverage to achieve minimum moisture loss.
3. B.
2.6
Curing compound must be compatible with the bond breaker and other finishes, including paint, and floor finish.
Reusable Wet Cure Covers: Impregnated fiber mat with a white or light colored backing having low permeability with high moisture retention to maintain the proper moisture content during the concrete curing process. Comply with ASTM C171 for reflection and moisture retention. BONDBREAKER
A.
Liquid Dissipating Membrane-Forming Curing Compound. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
The bond breaking material shall also be a dissipating membrane forming material complying with ASTM C 309-98a, Type I and I D, Class B. The bond breaking compound shall be applied with adequate time to dry prior to placement of reinforcing steel. The bond breaking compound shall dry in 30-minutes or less at 100°F to reduce panel clean up. Material shall be compatible with curing material. The bond breaker used shall be fully removed from the slab surface or shall be compatible with any curing compound or coating specified for interior or exterior concrete panels and slab
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for the proper cleaning procedures and finished surface preparation for the building slab, for proper procedures for post applying a liquid floor hardener or sealant to areas where bond breaker is present, and for proper cleaning procedures for preparation of painted surface and sealer applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CASTING SURFACES A.
Casting Slab Preparation: 1. 2.
03 47 00 Page 8
Casting slab shall be cured. At flat surfaces, saw cuts, cracks, joints or defects in the casting bed shall be filled so as to minimize transfer of the joint line to the panel face. Waste slabs, if used, shall be of sufficient thickness and strength so as not to crack with the weight of the panels. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3. 4.
Contractor shall be responsible for compatibility of curing agents, sealants, and releasing agents utilized in the Work. If panels are to be stacked, the troweled surface shall be considered the casting bed and shall be treated as the same. Isolation pockets shall be formed in such a manner as to minimize the transfer of the pocket to the finished appearance of the panel.
B.
Bondbreaker shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions for the applicable condition.
C.
Locate and install all inserts and anchorages required for the panels prior to casting of any concrete. Wet-setting of any insert is not permitted and wet-setting of any anchorage is not permitted unless approved by the Architect.
D.
After placing steel reinforcement for panels, check casting slab surfaces for continuity of bondbreaker. If touch-up or recoating of worn, damaged or missing areas is required, the Contractor shall remove the steel reinforcement entirely prior to re-application of the bondbreaker unless approved by the Architect.
E.
Make joints in forms water tight. Use only non-staining form release agent.
3.2
FORMING PANELS A.
Layout the panels for casting in a manner that minimizes the locations of floor joints, column isolation joints and other construction joints in the panel faces. Prevent the layout of the panels over temporarily poured casting surfaces such as pre-formed columns and pits unless deemed absolutely necessary.
B.
Forms shall be designed to maintain the perimeter of the panel as shown on the project drawings within 1/4-inch maximum deflection during pouring.
C.
Formed blockouts for openings in the panels shall be designed to limit the deflection during pouring to a maximum of 1/8 inch. Where reveals are specified in panels, assure that forming strips are straight and securely fastened to prevent movement or floating during placing operations and that alignment between adjacent panels is correct. Reveal tolerances shall comply with requirements specified in this Section.
D.
Use adequate steel supports to maintain clearance to finished surfaces. When tying steel take extreme care to make certain excess tie wire is cut short and cannot reach finished surface.
E.
Pre-Placement Cleaning: After completion of forming and steel placement and immediately before placing concrete. Vacuum and air blow all casting surfaces to remove all foreign material.
3.3
PLACING CONCRETE A.
Place concrete in accordance with recommendations in ACI 309 and the following: 1.
Concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around the embedded items, and into corners of the forms. ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
Cold joints shall not be permitted in an individual site cast tilt-up panel.
3. 3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A.
B.
C. 03 47 00 Page 10
Pre-placement testing.
1.
Test coarse aggregate for dry rodded unit weight whenever a sieve analysis is made, and when
2.
Inspect trucks used to transport architectural concrete to assure that they are clean and in condition to mix and to deliver a uniform mix at a low slump.
3.
Inspect aggregate stockpiles and storage and bring to the attention of the concrete producer and to the Architect any practices which are causing segregation or contamination within the stockpiles.
it appears that there has been a change in the characteristic of the aggregate. ASTM C-29.
Field Testing 1.
The Contractor shall make and store a minimum of four 6x12 cylinders or five 4x8 cylinders and four 6x6x24 beams in accordance to ASTM C31. Specimens shall be made for each class of concrete, for each 100 cu.yds. or fraction thereof, and for each day concrete is cast, or not less than once for each 5,000 sq.ft. of panel area.
2.
Test cylinders shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. A minimum of 2 from each set shall be tested at 7 days and the rest at 28 days.
3.
Test beams shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C78. At least two from each set shall be tested prior to panel erection. The average of the two beam results shall be considered the tested flexural strength to determine if the specified flexural strength has been met. Remaining specimens shall be kept in reserve in the event that additional testing is needed.
4.
Test specimens and test reports shall accurately indicate in which panel, by number and concrete delivery tag, the concrete represented by each test specimen was placed.
5.
Copies of test reports shall be distributed to Owner, Architect, Building Official and Contractor. Reports shall indicate location of tests, dates, technician, and other pertinent information
6.
Determine air content with every set of cylinders. ASTM C-231
7.
Furnish experienced concrete inspector to establish daily batch weights and inspect concrete at job site during placement.
Deficient Compressive Strength: In the event that concrete tests indicate a 7-day or 28-day strength below that which was specified, the Contractor with the agreement of the Architect shall ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 have the mix adjusted so that subsequent concrete will comply with the minimum strength requirements. 1. 2. 3.
3.5
The Owner may require core specimens to be taken and tested, at the Contractor’s expense. If core tests fall below minimum requirements, as determined by the Architect, the concrete in place will be deemed to be defective. This concrete shall be removed and replaced or strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Owner and Architect, at the Contractor’s expense. Demolition or repair of other materials or systems as a result of repair or replacement of defective concrete shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
CURING AND PROTECTION A.
Comply with recommendations in ACI 308 and the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Moist Curing in lieu of Liquid Membranes for Curing: 1. 2.
3.
3.6
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. Apply liquid membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Underlying panels in a stack cast arrangement shall be cured in the same manner as casting beds.
Cover panels completely with burlap strips immediately after finishing. Lay as many lines of soaker hose as needed. Quickly and completely wet the entire exposed surface. Cover panels completely with 4-mil polyethylene, transguard or burlene to prevent evaporation. The panels shall be kept wet for seven days. Do not allow alternate wetting and drying. The polyethylene shall be turned over and down the edge of the forms and securely fastened. In panels or areas to be cured, weight the polyethylene, transguard or burlene with enough and type of weight to prevent normal winds for the area from blowing it off the panels. Keep panels wet until erection begins or approved by the Architect.
CASTING TOLERANCES A.
Dimensions of the finished panels, prior to erection in the structure, shall conform to the casting tolerances stated below unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect.
B.
Deviation from Specified Height or Width of Structural Panel: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Up to 20 feet 20 feet to 30 feet Each additional 10-foot increment in excess of 30 feet Maximum overall tolerance
Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 3/8 inch Plus or minus 1/8 inch Plus or minus 5/8 inch
Deviation from Specified Panel Thickness: Note the tolerance listed is for the average variation ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 11
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 of panel thickness through any cross-section of the panel. 1.
D.
E.
1. 2.
6 ft. or less Each additional 6 ft. or part thereof
Plus or minus 1/8 inch Plus or minus 1/8 inch
3.
Not to exceed
Plus or minus 1/2 inch
Deviations from Specified Size:
4. 5. 6. 7.
2. 3. 4.
Plus or minus 1 inch Plus or minus 1/2 inch Plus or minus 1 inch Plus or minus 1 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/8 inch Plus or minus 1 inch
Embeds (Tipping & Flushness) Surface of concrete between embeds Depth of recess
Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch
Cover, in accordance with ACI 318 and in no case less than specified elsewhere Individual member (location) Perpendicular to plane of span Parallel to plane of span
Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1 inch
Dimensions of Thin-Brick Elements Incorporated into Tilt-up Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4.
03 47 00 Page 12
Blockout or opening Bolts, pipes or sleeves Lifting and bracing inserts per manufacturer’s specs, not to exceed Embeds Reglets for flashing or bricks Rustication or architectural feature Electrical box or accessory of another trade
Deviation from Specified Position of Reinforcement: 1.
I.
Plus or minus 1/2 inch Plus or minus 1/8 inch
Deviation from Plane: 1. 2. 3.
H.
Finished opening Rustication or architectural feature
Deviation from Specified Location (any direction): 1. 2. 3.
G.
Plus or minus 3/8 inch
Deviation in Length of Diagonals for a Rectangular Member or Opening, where Length of Diagonal is as follows. Note the tolerance listed is the measured difference in length of the two diagonals across any rectangle.
1. 2. F.
Variation
Thickness, variation Maximum thickness Minimum thickness Unit dimension 8 inches or less, variation ADDENDUM NO. 2
Plus 0, minus 1/16 inch 1 inch 1/2 inch Plus 0, minus 1/16 inch
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 5.
3.7
Unit dimension greater than 8 inches, variation
Plus 0, minus 3/32 inch
PANEL FINISH A.
Finish exposed surfaces of panels as indicated on the Drawings including both the front and back of the panels as well as any exposed edges as defined below. Visible surfaces of the panels, when in place shall be free from surface defects as defined below.
B.
Grade A - Architectural: Projects designed for the circulation of people within a distance of 10 feet to 25 feet. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Grade C – Utility for Panel Backs Only: Projects designed for remote areas with little or no public interaction and/or projects designed specifically for interior use with little or no emphasis towards the exterior design. 1. 2. 3.
3.8
Panel surfaces shall be free of voids, holes, pockets and other surface deformations greater than 1/8 inch. Surfaces of panels shall not project reinforcing patterns, floor joints or other projections or voids from the casting surface. Cracks are not permissible in excess of 1/32 inch.
Consult with the Architect and the Owner prior to initiating the project to determine the expectations for the project appearance. Panel surfaces showing voids, holes, pockets and other surface deformations are permissible provided they do not weaken the structural integrity of the panel or the finish of the panel/ Cracked surfaces are permissible provided the cracks are not resulting from structural weakness or failure and provided they do not present the potential for failure of the finish over the life of the building.
HANDLING AND ERECTION OF PANELS A.
Engineer panels for erection stresses and selection of lifting system and hardware. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Minimum strength of panels at time of erection shall be in accordance with the lifting design. It is recommended that the Contractor take extra test specimens and field cure to verify concrete strength of panels. Before starting erection operations, Contractor shall check relevant job site conditions insofar as they are ready for the erection of panels. Each element shall be properly marked to correspond with the designation indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. Use erection equipment that will prevent damage to existing construction, permanent floor slabs and panels. Damage to Work shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense and in a manner acceptable to the Architect prior to painting or coating. Temporary panel bracing shall not be removed until roof diaphragm is completely welded and installed.
Panels not attached to the building frame at the time of erection shall be braced in position using a bracing system designed to resist wind and other loads that may reasonably be determined ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 13
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 until structural connections have been made. There shall be a minimum of two braces per panel. Engineering of bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Panel bracing connection shall be maintained daily to assure tightness.
C.
Dry-pack grout installation and preparation for weld pockets and other panel block outs not cast in during pouring shall be performed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
D.
After Panels are Erected: 1. 2. 3.
3.9
Remove laitance down to sound concrete Surface to receive grout shall be rough and reasonably level Surface shall have been properly wet cured Do not use curing compounds Clean surface of oil, grease, dirt and loose particles. Remove free water from concrete and bolt holes immediately before grouting.
Check connecting bolts at the floor and panels daily to ensure tightness. Protect elements to prevent staining, warping or cracking. After panels are erected, dismantle panel erection devices and patch panels as required for a uniform appearance. After panels are erected, patch holes or other blemishes in casting slab that were caused by the panel casting and erection processes in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
Erection Tolerances: Dimensions of the finished panel in the erected position in the structure shall conform to the erection tolerances stated below unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect.
B.
Deviation from Specified Dimension Between Controlling Surface or Line and Building Reference Line: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Any 10 feet of member height Each additional 10 feet of height Not to exceed
Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1/4 inch Plus or minus 1 inch
Deviation from Specified Relationship of Adjacent Members: 1. 2. 3.
03 47 00 Page 14
Plus 1/2 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Plus 1/4 inch, minus 1/2 inch. Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Deviation from Plumb of the Controlling Surface or Line: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Horizontal dimension to vertical surface Vertical dimension to horizontal surface From top elevation
Matching edges at horizontal and vertical joints Matching faces exposed to view Matching faces not exposed to view ADDENDUM NO. 2
Plus or minus 1/2 inch Plus or minus 3/8 inch Plus or minus 3/4 inch
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 4. 5. 6.
E.
1/2 inch 1/8 inch Plus or minus 1/8 inch
Deviation from Specified Joint Width: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
3.10
Bowing between adjacent members Alignment of brick mortar joints across joints, jog in alignment. Alignment of brick mortar joints across joints, alignment with panel centerline
Vertical joint (governs over joint taper), total Horizontal joint (governs over joint taper), total Visually noncritical joint Joint taper over any 10 ft. length measured between the panels at the exterior face of the panels at the joint. Joint taper over entire length measured between the panels at the exterior face of the panels at the joint Variation in width of exposed brick mortar joints measured difference in joint width indicating the panel edges are not parallel
Plus or minus 3/8 inch. Plus or minus 3/8 inch Plus or minus 1/2 inch
3/8 inch
Plus or minus 1/2 inch
Plus or minus 1/8 in
SEALING OF PANEL JOINTS
A.
Clean the panel joints of contaminants, including form release agents and concrete laitance. Dust and loose particles shall be blown out or otherwise cleaned to provide proper bond. Apply sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Install fire-resistive blanket where indicated.
C.
Install joint insulation where indicated to consist of a limited expansion polyurethane insulation or an approved equal as provided in accordance with Section 072000 – Insulation.
D.
Install back-up rod, primer, paint and sealant in accordance with Section 079200 – Sealants and Caulking.
3.11 A. 3.12
ATTACHING PANELS TO BUILDING FRAME Perform welding in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. Wait a minimum of 28 days from panel casting before making panel-to-panel welds. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove trash, debris, surplus materials, tools and equipment from site on a regular basis.
B.
After erection, the General Contractor shall protect site-cast tilt-up concrete surfaces from ADDENDUM NO. 2
03 46 00 Page 15
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 damage by subsequent construction operations until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
03 47 00 Page 16
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Section 04 20 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.1
This Section includes the following: 1.
Concrete unit masonry
2.
Installation requirements for pre-cast concrete trim.
3.
Reinforcement and anchorages.
4.
Concealed flashing.
5.
Cavity and masonry void insulation.
6.
Building in of items and anchors shown as built into or embedded in masonry.
RELATED SECTIONS B.
Division 03: Architectural Precast Concrete for product requirements.
C.
Division 05: Structural Steel Framing, for furnishing and installing connections attached to structural-steel framing; Metal Fabrications, for loose steel lintels and anchors for fabrications embedded in masonry.
D.
Division 07: Water Repellents, for water-repellent finish treatments; Joint Sealants, for exterior and interior applications.
E.
Division 08: Hollow Metal Frames, for door openings set into masonry.
F.
Division 15: Mechanical items built into or embedded in masonry, penetrations, and sleeves.
G.
Division 16: Electrical items built into or embedded in masonry, penetrations, and sleeves. SUBMITTALS – ACTION
1.2 H.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
I.
Product Data:
J.
K.
1.
Each type of masonry unit; include information on compressive strength for CMU.
2.
Manufactured reinforcement, ties, anchors, and metal accessories.
3.
Insulation.
4.
Flashing.
5.
Masonry cement.
Shop Drawings: 1.
Face brick and thin brick special shapes.
2.
Reinforcement for engineered masonry; prepare drawings
Samples – Selection: 1.
L.
Colored Mortar: Available standard colors.
Samples – Verification:
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
1. M.
Face Brick: Full size units of each type of exposed masonry unit; demonstrate full range of variation in colors and textures for each type.
Colored Mortar: Cured samples that demonstrate color and texture using same sand mortar ingredients to be used in the Work. SUBMITTALS – INFORMATIONAL
1.3 A.
Pre-installation conference records.
B.
Reports by independent testing and inspecting agency.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Reference Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures except as otherwise indicated. 1.
Definitions stated in the Contract Documents take precedence over those stated in Part 1.1.2.
2.
Notwithstanding publication dates listed in Section 1.3, comply with reference standards in effect as of date of Contract, unless otherwise required by law. Reference standards withdrawn or discontinued by their publishers shall not govern the Work.
3.
Delete Sections 1.4 and 1.7, and Parts 1.5.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2, including all subordinate text.
B.
Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by UL or other agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Single Source Responsibility For Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or uniform blend within ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by single manufacturer for each different product required.
D.
Single Source Responsibility For Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
E.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting per requirements of Section 01310. Schedule meeting after mockups have been constructed.
1.5
MOCK-UPS A.
B.
04 20 00 Page 2
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. 1.
Typical first floor.
2.
Typical upper floor with one standard size fixed wood window.
Include: 1.
Pre-cast concrete trim (all shapes).
2.
Steel stud and sheathing backup.
3.
Vertical veneer expansion joint.
4.
Veneer anchors.
5.
Flashing.
6.
Weep vents, mortar dropping collector, flashing.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
7.
Sealant.
C.
Location: As directed by Architect.
D.
Size: Minimum 8 ft high by 8 ft long.
E.
Provide suitable foundations and bracing needed for strength and stability to maintain mockup in undamaged condition.
F.
Demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for use in the Work.
G.
Clean exposed faces using materials and procedures proposed for final Work.
H.
Revise materials and techniques as needed to achieve specified requirements, including appearance characteristics.
I.
Accepted mockup shall serve as comparison standard for the Work. Maintain mockup in clean, undamaged condition.
J.
Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; esthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.
K.
Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviation from Contract Documents.
L.
When directed by Architect, demolish and remove mock-ups from site.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING A.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
B.
Protect masonry units and mortar materials from absorbing moisture before installation. Dry units that become wet.
C.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, in dry location.
D.
Protect bulk materials from contamination.
E.
Maintain graded aggregates without mixture with other sizes or other materials.
F.
Prevent metal accessories from rusting, and from accumulating dirt and oil.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Protect tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof covers while construction is not in progress. Extend covers minimum 24 inches down both sides and secure against displacement by adverse weather. 1.
Where one wythe of multi-wythe walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover minimum 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, soil, and other substances from staining masonry surfaces to be left exposed or to receive paint or coatings. Remove mortar, grout, and soil from such surfaces immediately. 1.
Move scaffolding boards near masonry when not in use in order to prevent rain from splashing off boards onto masonry.
2.
Protect bottoms of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar spatters.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 3
02/07/18
1.8
MSCAA 14-1386-02
3.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and grout droppings.
4.
Protect finish surfaces of windows, doors, and other non-masonry construction from mortar and grout droppings.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Do not lay masonry units that are rain-soaked or frozen.
B.
Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
C.
Cold Weather Procedures: Comply with ACI 530.1 Article 2.3.2.2 when ambient temperature or masonry unit temperature is below 40 deg F.
D.
Hot Weather Procedures: Comply with ACI 530.1 Article 2.3.2.3 when ambient temperature is above 100 deg F or above 90 deg F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph.
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A.
Manufacturer: Obtain concrete masonry units from one manufacturer.
B.
Hollow Loadbearing CMU: ASTM C90.
C.
Unit Compressive Strength: Minimum 1900 psi.
D.
Weight Classification: Lightweight units of nominal 95 pcf density manufactured with expanded shale aggregate produced by rotary kiln process, graded to uniform texture, and conforming to ASTM C331.
E.
Curing: Steam treatment.
F.
Block Size: Nominal 8 by 16 inch face dimensions for exterior back-up typically and nominal 6 by 16 inch face dimensions for all other, unless specifically otherwise indicated.
G.
Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.
H.
Special Shapes: Furnish special shapes where shown or needed for bond beams, lintels, corners, jambs, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
I.
Normal Weight Concrete Masonry: Provide units complying with ASTM C90, weighing 125 pcf or more, with minimum 1900 psi in manufacturer’s standard gray color.
J.
All CMU units shall have integral waterproofing.
2.2
MORTAR AND GROUT A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91.
B.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of ASTM C150 Type I or Type III portland cement and ASTM C207 Type S hydrated lime.
C.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
D.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E.
Water: Clean and potable; free of staining substances and substances that adversely affect set or bond strength.
F.
Water Repellent Admixture: Liquid water repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMU that contains water repellent by manufacturer of integral water repellent used in CMU.
04 20 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
G.
2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Cold Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C494 Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1.
Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
2.
Morset; W.R. Grace
REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed billet bars, except #2 and #3 bars shall be Grade 40.
2.4
JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from a single manufacturer. 1.
AA Wire Products Co.
2.
Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
3.
Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
4.
Hohmann & Barnard, inc.
5.
Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Of America.
6.
National Wire Products Industries.
7.
Southern Construction Products.
B.
Base Wire: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel wire; ASTM A153 Class B-2 zinc coating.
C.
Joint Reinforcement Fabrication: ACI 530.1 Article 3.2.1.1.2; 10 ft flat units. 1.
Width: As needed to provide minimum 5/8 inch mortar cover in exterior joints, 1/2 inch in interior joints.
2.
Supply factory fabricated corner and tee intersection units.
D.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; 0.1875 inch side rods, 0.1483 inch cross rods; hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
E.
Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; 0.1875 inch side rods, 0.1483 cross rods; hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
F.
1.
Cross Rod Spacing: Maximum 16 inches.
2.
Number of Side Rods: One for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in width, plus one side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.
Veneer Anchors: Seismic type units consisting of metal anchor section and connector section designed to engage continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. 1.
Anchorage Section: Formed steel strap with minimum 2 fasteners and self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and to prevent moisture from penetrating sheathing at pronged legs and screw holes.
2.
Connector Section: Trapezoidal or rectangular shapes formed from galvanized wire with connector for positive connection of continuous horizontal wire. Use wire thickness recommended by manufacturer for tie sizes, but not less than 3/16 inch diameter. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 3/4 inch cover on outside face.
3.
Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.0677 inch thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 5
02/07/18
G.
2.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02
4.
Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.1875 inch diameter hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
5.
Continuous Wire: 0.1875 inch diameter hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
6.
Galvanizing: Class B2.
Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer. 1.
Size: As recommended by veneer anchor manufacturer, but not less than #10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by minimum 3 exposed threads.
2.
Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.
ACCESSORIES A.
Through-Wall Flashing: Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick formed with interlocking ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. 1.
B.
Provide lap and corner sealant recommended by flashing manufacturer for Project applications.
Membrane Flashing: Butyl or rubberized asphalt laminated with polyethylene facing.
C.
1.
Perm-A-Barrier; Grace Construction Products.
2.
Waterproofing Membrane 104AHT; Royston Laboratories, Inc.
3.
Polyken 620 Series; Polyken Technologies.
Compressible Joint Filler: Compressible filler strips suitable for use with sealant specified in Section 07900; ASTM D1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A, Grade 1; compressible to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or urethane. 1.
Size fillers for 30–40 percent installed compression.
2.
Size fillers so that edges are 1/2 inch from exterior masonry faces.
D.
Control Joint Strips for CMU: Solid rubber strips with Shore A hardness of 60 to 80; designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry walls; sizes and configurations as needed.
E.
Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D226, Type I #15 asphalt roofing felt.
F.
Weep Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion manufactured from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to weep moisture from masonry cavity to exterior, sized to fill head joints with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. "Cell Vent" or similar product. 1.
G.
2.6
Colors: Standard colors selected by Architect.
Mortar Dropping Collector: 1.
Mortar Net; AA Wire Products Company.
2.
Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc. (distr. By York Flashings).
MASONRY CLEANERS A.
04 20 00 Page 6
Job Mixed Detergent Solution: 1/2 cup dry measure "Spic and Span" or other tetrasodium polyphosphate cleaner and 1/2 cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gallon of water.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
B.
2.7
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Proprietary Cleaner: At Contractor's option, proprietary cleaners may be proposed for use, subject to Architect's approval. MIXES
A.
Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically permitted. Request prior permission of Architect to use air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, and antifreeze compounds. 1.
Admixtures containing calcium chloride or other free chloride ions will not be permitted.
2.
If cold-weather admixture is permitted, use same quantity in all mortar, regardless of weather, to ensure uniform color.
B.
Keep sand uniformly damp at all times.
C.
Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in mechanical batch mixers; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
D.
Color: Mix mortar to produce colors of uniform appearance.
E.
Mortar Mix: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.
F.
Mortar Types: 1.
Type M: Masonry below grade, in contact with earth.
2.
Type S: Reinforced, engineered masonry.
3.
Type N: Masonry veneer, all uses where another type is not indicated.
G.
Ready-Mix Mortar: At Contractor's option, ready-mixed mortar with set-controlling admixtures conforming to ASTM C1142 and Project requirements may be used instead of site-mixed mortar.
H.
Grout Mix: ASTM C476; mix to consistency to completely fill grout spaces.
PART 3 3.1
1.
Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension.
2.
Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension. EXECUTION
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 Where those tolerances are exceeded, do not install masonry until corrective measures acceptable to the Architect have been completed.
B.
Verify that items to be built into masonry are in proper locations and complete with anchors.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Provide temporary bracing needed for support and stability during installation. Maintain temporary bracing until permanent construction provides permanent bracing and stability.
B.
Coordinate placement of anchors and other built in items.
C.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections INSTALLATION –COURSING
3.3 A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing and alignment.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect masonry from displacement.
C.
Match coursing, bonding, and joints of existing masonry.
D.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimensions. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform 3/8 inch thickness.
E.
Fitting: Use full-size units where possible. Cut units to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjacent work. Produce clean, sharp, unchipped edges. 1.
Cut brick with motor-driven saws.
2.
Use dry cutting saws for CMU.
INSTALLATION –PLACING AND BONDING
3.4 A.
Lay units that have variation in color in random arrangement without discernible pattern. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.
B.
Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs unless noted otherwise.
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back one-half unit length in each course; do not tooth unfinished edges. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and wet in-place clay masonry units before resuming work. Remove insecure masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
D.
Lay solid brick-size masonry units in full bed of mortar with full head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
E.
1.
Lay brick on flashing without mortar in bed joints.
2.
At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick.
Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: 1.
Apply full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2.
Bed webs in mortar in starting courses on foundations. Where cells are not grouted, spread full mortar bed, including areas under cells.
3.
Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to spaces that are to be filled with grout.
F.
Fill collar joints between wythes solid with mortar or grout.
G.
Buttering corners of joints and excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
H.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
I.
Interlock each course of each wythe at corners and intersections.
J.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace the units in fresh mortar.
K.
Tool joints when mortar is thumbprint hard. For exposed masonry tool joints at same consistency throughout the work to ensure color uniformity.
L.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile or other adhesively-applied finish is scheduled, and where bitumen dampproofing is indicated.
M.
Isolate top joints of non-load-bearing masonry walls from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler except where firestopping is required.
04 20 00 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
N.
Isolate masonry from shelf angles above with horizontal pressure relief joints formed with compressible joint filler.
O.
Isolate masonry from vertical structural members with minimum 1 inch clearance. Fill joint with glass fiber boards. INSTALLATION – BUILT-IN WORK
3.5 A.
As work progresses, build in metal door and opening frames and other built-in items.
B.
Build in items plumb and level, accurately located and aligned.
C.
Fill spaces in door frames and around other built-in items solid with mortar or grout. Rod mortar or grout to ensure that there are no voids and to form tight interface with masonry.
D.
Bed anchors for opening frames in adjacent mortar joints.
E.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place metal lath in joint below before grouting.
F.
Fill cores in hollow CMU with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Exterior Door Frames: Insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch to act as thermal break between frame and masonry. INSTALLATION – CAVITIES
3.6 A.
Keep cavities behind veneer and weeps clear of mortar and debris.
B.
Fill bottoms of cavities above flashings with mortar droppings collector. Set collector units in contact with adjacent units and without gaps that would allow mortar to collect in bottom of cavity. INSTALLATION – CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
3.7 A.
Do not form continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restrain of wall or partition movement.
B.
Build in joint fillers of width to permit installation of sealant at proper depth. Maintain uniform slot depth.
C.
Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar.
D.
Where indicated, install continuous control joint strips in slots to maintain alignment of wall.
E.
Obtain prior approval of Architect for additional control and expansion joints requested by Contractor.
F.
CMU Control Joints: Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar.
G.
Brick Expansion Joints: Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod. Maintain joints free and clear of mortar.
H.
Horizontal Pressure Relief Joints: Provide joints below shelf angles, structural framing members, precast concrete, other construction materials subject to deflection or creep, and where indicated. 1.
Insert compressible filler into joints.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
INSTALLATION – STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY
3.8 A.
Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes.
B.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. 1.
C.
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at corners using factory fabricated L units in addition to masonry bonding.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes. 1.
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement by using factory fabricated T units.
INSTALLATION – HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
3.9 A.
Install reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend reinforcement 16 inches beyond opening jambs.
B.
Install reinforcement continuous in first and second horizontal joints below tops of walls.
C.
Lap reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
D.
Use factory fabricated L and T units for corners and intersections. Cut and bend reinforcement per manufacturer recommendations for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
E.
Interrupt horizontal joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints.
F.
Embed side rods in mortar with minimum 5/8 inch coverage at exterior faces of masonry, minimum 1/2 inch elsewhere.
3.10
INSTALLATION – VENEER OVER STUD FRAMING
A.
Masonry Veneer Over Stud Framing: Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to studs with minimum 2 screws.
B.
Embed tie sections in masonry.
C.
Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down.
D.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o/c vertically and 24 inches o/c horizontally with at least 1 anchor for each 2.66 sq ft of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches.
3.11
INSTALLATION – ANCHORAGE TO STRUCTURE
A.
Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors where masonry abuts or faces concrete structural members. Where masonry abuts structural steel members, anchor masonry with steel straps as indicated.
B.
Space anchors as noted, but not more than 24 inches o/c vertically or 36 inches o/c horizontally.
C.
Secure anchor sections to structural members. Position anchor sections so ties are centered on anchor section.
D.
Provide open space of minimum 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep space open and free of mortar or other rigid materials.
04 20 00 Page 10
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
E.
Embed tie sections in masonry joints with minimum 5/8 inch mortar coverage.
F.
Fasten lateral braces rigidly and securely to overhead structure.
3.12
INSTALLATION – LINTELS
A.
Provide minimum 8 inch bearing at each jamb, unless shown otherwise.
B.
Exterior Masonry: Install loose steel lintels. Provide bond breaks and minimum 1/2 inch clearance space at each end of steel lintels to allow unrestrained linear expansion.
C.
Interior Concrete Unit Masonry: Install precast lintels or reinforced unit masonry lintels where shown or where openings in CMU more than 16 inches wide are shown without other support.
D.
Reinforced Unit Masonry Lintels:
3.13 A.
1.
Place reinforcement bars in single, unspliced lengths.
2.
Provide minimum 1/2 inch clearance between bars and face of masonry.
3.
Support and secure reinforcement against displacement; maintain bars within 1/2 inch of dimensioned positions.
4.
Provide temporary supports until lintels have attained sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.
INSTALLATION – FLASHING AND WEEPS Install flashing at following locations to divert infiltrated water to exterior: 1.
Below first course on foundation.
2.
Lintels.
3.
Shelf angles.
4.
Ledges and other obstructions.
5.
Where indicated.
B.
Remove projections which could puncture flashing. Remove loose particles and substances which could impair bond.
C.
Place flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar.
D.
Turn up back of flashing minimum 8 inches and seal watertight to sheathing, concrete, or masonry backup.
E.
Extend flashing through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. At lintels, turn flashing down over outer edge of angle or window trim. 1.
Exception: If self-adhesive flashing is used, treat outer edges per manufacturer recommendations.
F.
Install opening sill and lintel flashing in single, unpieced lengths extending 4 inches beyond opening jambs, and turn up ends 2 inches to form end dam pans.
G.
Extend flashing at shelf angles minimum 4 inches into masonry at each end.
H.
Lap ends 6 inches and seal watertight. Seal penetrations, corners, and other joints watertight.
I.
Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn down to form drip.
J.
Install weep vents in veneer at 32 inches o/c horizontally at following locations: 1.
Above shelf angles and lintels.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 11
02/07/18
3.14
MSCAA 14-1386-02
2.
Above through-wall flashing.
3.
At bottoms of walls.
4.
At tops of walls.
5.
Where noted.
INSTALLATION – GROUTED COMPONENTS
A.
Remove wastes, loose mortar particles, and other substances from spaces that are to receive grout.
B.
Clean reinforcing of loose rust and other substances that impair bond.
C.
Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters.
D.
Support bars and secure them against displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.
E.
Fill spaces with grout and consolidate to form full contact interface with reinforcement and masonry free of air bubbles and other voids. Place and consolidate grout without displacing reinforcing.
F.
At bearing locations, fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout minimum 3 courses below unless noted otherwise.
3.15
INSTALLATION – ENGINEERED REINFORCED MASONRY
A.
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Provide formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1.
Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
2.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
3.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.
B.
Lay masonry units with core cells and voids for reinforcing vertically aligned, clear of mortar, and unobstructed.
C.
Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1/4 inch from edges of grout spaces, beveled back and upward.
D.
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.
E.
Place and maintain reinforcing bars within 1/2 inch of dimensioned positions.
F.
Support vertical reinforcement in position at tops and bottoms of cells, and at maximum 192 bar diameter intervals between.
G.
Wet surfaces of clay brick that will be in contact with grout.
H.
Fill spaces with grout and consolidate to form full contact interface with reinforcement and masonry free of air bubbles and other voids. Place and consolidate grout without displacing reinforcing.
I.
Low Lift Grouting: 1.
04 20 00 Page 12
Place first lift of grout to height of 16 inches and consolidate.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
2. J.
K.
L.
3.16
Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and consolidate each lift.
Pour Heights For Fine Grout: Minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches:
Maximum 12 inches.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches:
Maximum 60 inches.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches:
Maximum 12 ft.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches:
Maximum 24 ft.
Pour Heights For Coarse Grout: Minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches:
Maximum 12 inches.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches:
Maximum 60 inches.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches:
Maximum 12 ft.
Minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches:
Maximum 24 ft.
Cleanout Holes: Provide cleanout holes minimum 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. 1.
Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.
2.
At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o/c.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
B.
Provide testing by qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Testing Frequency: Each 5,000 sq ft of walls or fraction thereof.
D.
Mortar Composition and Properties: Evaluate per ASTM C780.
E.
Grout: Sample and test compressive strength per ASTM C1019.
F.
Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: Absent other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests meet minimum indicated requirements.
3.17
ADJUSTING
A.
Remove and provide new replacement units for masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, cracked, stained, or otherwise damaged, and damaged units, and for units which do not match adjacent units as intended. Install new units in fresh mortar without visible signs of replacement.
B.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying. Clean and reset them in fresh mortar. Do not shift units by pounding or other means which have already been set.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
04 20 00 Page 13
02/07/18
C.
3.18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Point voids and holes (except weeps) full with mortar that matches adjacent joints in appearance. Prepare sealant joints for application of sealant. CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Perform dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: Perform cleaning after mortar has cured minimum 2 weeks in warm weather, 3 weeks in cold weather.
C.
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2.
Test cleaning methods on mock-up panel, leaving one half uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with final cleaning.
Cleaning Method - Face Brick: Bucket and brush method described in BIA "Technical Note #20." 1.
Do not use muriatic acid in any form.
2.
Proprietary masonry cleaners may be used if approved in advance by Architect.
3.
If proprietary cleaner is used, neutralize surfaces per manufacturer recommendations.
D.
Cleaning Method - CMU: Remove mortar spots and dropping by dry brushing at end of each day's work and after final pointing. Comply with recommendations in NCMA Tek Bulletin #45.
E.
Cleaning Method – Stone Trim: Comply with recommendations in the Indiana Limestone Handbook of the Indiana Limestone Institute of America.
3.19
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protection boards at exposed outside corners vulnerable to chipping and other damage from construction operations. END OF SECTION
04 20 00 Page 14
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 05 51 10 METAL PAN STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements Sections apply to this section.
SUMMARY A.
Provide metal pan stairs as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the work.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding specified structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Calculate loads to produce maximum stress in each component of metal stairs.
B.
Stairs: In addition to live load criteria stated herein, design stairs components for erection and temporary construction loads.
C.
Treads, Landings, Platforms: Capable of withstanding without failure or permanent deformation 100 lbf/ft uniform live load or 300 lbf concentrated load on an area of 4 sq inches, whichever produces greater stress.
D.
Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.
E.
Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members under design loads to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.
F.
Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads when tested per ASTM E894 and ASTM E935.
G.
1.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft applied in any direction.
2.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point in any direction.
3.
Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Wall-Mounted Handrails: Capable of withstanding the following loads when tested per ADDENDUM NO. 2
05 51 10 Page 1
02/07/2018
MSCAA 14-1386-02 ASTM E894 and ASTM E935.
H.
1.4
1.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft applied in any direction.
2.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point in any direction.
3.
Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Guard Infill: Capable of withstanding the following loads when tested per ASTM E935. 1.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally to an area not exceeding 1 sq ft at any point in the system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or open space.
2.
Guard in-fill loads need not be assumed to be acting concurrently with loads on top rails in determining stress on guards.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Handrails: Continuous gripping surfaces without interruption by posts, other structural elements, or obstructions. Provide handrails along open-sided flights of stairs and landings that have continuous gripping surfaces at changes in direction.
B.
Guard Infill Design: Intermediate rails, balusters, or other construction such that a 4-inch diameter sphere cannot pass through any opening.
C.
Exception: Triangular openings formed by riser, tread, and bottom rail at the open side of a stairway shall be such that a 6-inch sphere cannot pass.
D.
Design: Unless otherwise indicated, provide guards with vertical steel bar pickets (balusters).
E.
Headroom: Maintain 80 inch minimum headroom at all locations in the stairway.
F.
Uniformity of Risers and Treads: Provide stairs with uniform depth tread and uniform height risers. 1.
G.
1.5
Fabrication and Installation Tolerances: Comply with International Building Code section 1003.3.3.3.1.
Handicapped Accessibility Standard: In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, provide Work conforming to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).
SUBMITTALS A.
05 51 10 Page 2
Provide stamp and seal of design engineer and statement of conformance to performance and design requirements. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 B.
1.6
1.7
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal stairs. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 1.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2.
Indicate size and locations of loads imposed on building structure.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be fabricated and installed by the same firm.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FERROUS METALS A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcherleveled sheet.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. ADDENDUM NO. 2
05 51 10 Page 3
02/07/2018
MSCAA 14-1386-02
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
E.
Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless another grade is required by design loads.
F.
Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
G.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
2.2
2.3
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
D.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
E.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
F.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.
Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.
Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
PAINT A.
05 51 10 Page 4
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modifiedalkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.4
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
GROUT A.
2.5
2.6
CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Castin-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi, unless higher strengths are indicated on drawings.
B.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.
SAFETY NOSING A.
2.7
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
American Safety Tread Type 9311, 1-7/8” x ¼” thick, full length with integrally extruded 5/8” anchor, or equal.
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
B.
Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, handrails, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1.
Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3.
Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.
NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. ADDENDUM NO. 2
05 51 10 Page 5
02/07/2018
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
2.8
Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
E.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
F.
Weld connections to comply with the following: 1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
G.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A.
Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural-steel channels, plates, or a combination of both, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers.
B.
Metal Risers, Subtread Pans, and Subplatforms: Form to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness necessary to support indicated loads, but not less than 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm).
05 51 10 Page 6
1.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on side of subtreads to be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
2.9
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.
4.
Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
5.
Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded a minimum of 20 mm 3/4 inch
6.
At Contractor's option, precast or factory-filled treads instead of site-filled pans are acceptable.
FINISHES A.
Comply with NAAMM'S "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1.
D.
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of metal stair components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.
C.
Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. ADDENDUM NO. 2
05 51 10 Page 7
02/07/2018 E.
3.2
3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
GUARDS AND RAILINGS A.
Posts and Rails: Manufacturer’s standard components.
B.
Handrails: Circular profile, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C.
Interconnect members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option.
D.
At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of tube to which end is joined, and weld all around.
E.
Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
G.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting railings and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.
H.
Connect railing posts to interior stair framing by direct welding.
I.
Wall-Mounted Handrail Brackets: Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
J.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES A.
05 51 10 Page 8
Clean bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 B.
3.4
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1.
Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
2.
Apply one coat of primer to all surfaces except those that are galvanized or are to be field welded, or are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
3.
Apply second coat of primer to surfaces that will be concealed when installed, and to edges, corners, bolts, and welds.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
05 51 10 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 06 40 00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section. SUMMARY
A.
Provide interior architectural woodwork complete as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the work. 1.
B.
1.3
Wood cabinetry and countertops.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
2.
Division 9 Section “Painting” for field finishing of interior architectural wood work items that do not have plastic laminate finish.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
In addition to cabinetry, countertops, miscellaneous trim, and items indicated on drawings, interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1.
Show details full size.
2.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
4.
Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. ADDENDUM NO. 2
06 40 00 Page 1
02/07/18 B.
1.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Samples for Initial Selection: 1.
Countertop materials.
2.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
3.
Plastic laminate colors/patterns on actual material.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, or specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for "Custom" grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.
1.6
Where specifically indicated on Drawings, comply with AWI “Premium” grade for materials, fabrication and installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.
06 40 00 Page 2
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
1.8
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Plain-sliced, Red Oak, or any closed-grain hard wood suitable for stain finish.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Southern pine, Eastern white pine, or western white pine.
D.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
E.
1.
Hardboard: AHAA135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
3.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4.
Exposed Particle Board: #45 Premium Industrial Particleboard, glued with interior clue. Provide particleboard complying with ASTM E-84 Fire Test, Class C.
5.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: 1.
Formica Corporation.
2.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
3.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
06 40 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
F.
Composite Base: Provide Cali Bamboo, square edge boards fabricated from 70% reclaimed bamboo and 30% HDPE plastic, provide in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. Refer to Drawings for size.
G.
Stainless Steel Countertops: Provide stainless steel countertops fabricated from minimum 14 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with wood backing and brushed satin finish. Fabricate tops with square edges with 1-1/2” return. Provide integrated sinks and backsplashes as indicated on Drawings.
2.2
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. Provide soft-close hardware for cabinets and file drawers.
B.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: 1.
Semi-concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
D.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
G.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; integral style; full-extension type; epoxy-coatedsteel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades: 1.
Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf (440N).
H.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
I.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
J.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
K.
06 40 00 Page 4
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.
2.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
Cabinet Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
2.3
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips:
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothedsteel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
Adhesive for Bonding Decorative Plastic Laminate and Bonding Edges: As recommended by manufacturer of plastic laminate.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B.
Install laminated plastic in single pieces up to the limits of the sheet sizes; small patches will not be accepted.
C.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
E.
1.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.
2.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and ADDENDUM NO. 2
06 40 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
F.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.
G.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
2.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed surfaces.
3.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
I.
Provide hardware required for locking of all doors and drawers.
J.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.5
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETRY A.
Grade: Provide AWI “Custom” grade, except where “Premium” is noted on the Drawings.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C.
AWI Construction Style: Style B, Face Frame.
D.
AWI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.
E.
AWI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
F.
Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
G.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:
06 40 00 Page 6
1.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS nominal.050-inch thick.
2.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS .nominal 029-inch thick. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 H.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces: 1.
For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate.
2.
Drawer Sides and Backs Drawer Bottoms: Melamine on all visible surfaces with drawer in normal open position.
I.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
J.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.
K. 2.6
As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns and finishes.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. SHOP FINISHING
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Custom Grade, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B.
Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing architectural woodwork.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to endgrain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. ADDENDUM NO. 2
06 40 00 Page 7
02/07/18 3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02 INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E.
Cabinets and Shelving: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F.
G.
06 40 00 Page 8
1.
Install cabinets and shelving with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
Countertops: Anchor countertops securely. 1.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
3.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06 40 00
ADDENDUM NO. 2
06 40 00 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
06 40 00 Page 10
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section. SUMMARY
A.
B. 1.3
Provide building insulation as specified, as indicated on Drawings and as required to achieve indicated R-values and maintain the thermal continuity of the building envelope. 1.
Foundation insulation.
2.
Concealed building insulations.
3.
Spray foam insulation.
Related Sections: Refer to Division 9 Section “Acoustical Insulation”. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Thermal Resistivity: Required R-values are for values determined at 75 deg F.
B.
Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with fire-test response characteristics determined by testing, using methods specified below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Unless noted otherwise, required fire performance characteristics apply to facings as well as base insulation material.
1.4
1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.
2.
Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect insulations from physical damage and deterioration, including loss of insulating or other characteristics.
B.
Protect insulations from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 21 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION A.
Thicknesses: Furnish insulation types and thicknesses indicated and as needed to provide indicated R-values.
B.
High Density Foundation Insulation: Extruded polystyrene boards; ASTM C578, Type VI, 40 psi minimum compressive strength. Provide products of the following, or equal.
C.
D. 2.2
1.
Dow Chemical USA, Highload 40.
2.
Owens Corning, Foamular 400.
Batt Insulation: Mineral fibers with thermosetting resin binders; ASTM C665, Type I, Class A blankets, as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Johns-Manville, or Knauf. 1.
Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
2.
Flame Spread: Maximum 25.
3.
Smoke Developed: Maximum 50.
4.
Unit Size: Use widths that fill framing spaces.
5.
R-Value: Where indicated provide high performance R-21 un-faced, batt insulation at other locations provide insulation to achieve indicated R-value.
Spray Foam Insulation: Self-expanding polyurethane or Icynene brand insulation for spray application. ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and conforming to requirements for fire-test response characteristics of insulation.
B.
Crack Sealer: Type recommended by extruded polystyrene insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids between units.
C.
Wire Netting for Supporting Insulation above Ceiling: Minimum 20 gauge, galvanized hex netting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
07 21 00 Page 2
Remove projections and sharp edges that might puncture or tear insulation facings. Remove projections that interfere with placement of insulation. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not be exposed at any time to ice and snow.
B.
Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated.
C.
Cut and fit insulation closely to adjacent insulation units, surrounding construction, penetrations, and obstructions.
D.
Apply insulation in single layer unless otherwise shown or acceptable to Architect.
E.
Stuff tufts of un-faced batt insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavities as indicated or as needed to complete thermal envelope. Compact insulation to approximately 40 percent of normal volume.
F.
Provide noncorrosive impaling pins, wires, or other mechanical anchorage or support as needed to maintain insulation permanently in place. Where impaling pins are exposed to human contact, provide protective caps.
3.3
FOUNDATION INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
Apply at locations indicated on Drawings.
B.
On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive.
C.
Set boards with edges of adjacent boards butted in full contact, and maximum 3/16 inch joints at penetrations and perimeter.
D.
Secure boards against displacement during backfilling and concrete placement.
E.
Fill voids, cracks, and joints wider than 3/16 inch with crack sealer or with strips cut from boards and wedged in place.
F.
Protect foundation insulation from damage and displacement during backfilling and concrete placement.
3.4
BATT INSULATION IN WALLS A.
B. 3.5
Set wall insulation in full contact with adjacent framing and furring strips. Provide adhesive anchorage or impaling clips as needed to hold units in place until protective construction is in place. Friction fit batt insulation into framing spaces and tape facing flanges to framing. SPRAY FOAM INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Use spray foam insulation to fill cracks. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 21 00 Page 3
02/07/18
B. 3.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Perimeter shim spaces of exterior opening frames.
2.
Apply spray foam insulation at concealed locations as required to provide continuity of thermal insulation coverage.
Trim insulation flush with adjacent surfaces as needed for installation of concealing construction. CLEANING
A.
Remove misapplications, spills, and displacements of loose insulation from ventilation spaces and other areas.
B.
Remove misapplications and spills of adhesive from exposed surfaces.
3.7
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed insulation from harmful weather exposures, from water absorption, and from physical abuse.
B.
Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where installation of concealing work is delayed. END OF SECTION 072100
07 21 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 07 22 16 ROOF INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.5
A.
Submit a layout drawing showing roof slopes, offsets, major penetrations, crickets, minimum and maximum thickness.
A.
Submit a section drawing showing the installation order of the various products for each condition, and other pertinent data; including the Roofing Manufacturer’s most current specification sheets describing the proposed materials and method of installation required to qualify for manufacturer’s warranty and meet Factory Mutual (FM) requirements.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING Attend a pre-roofing meeting with Owner, Architect and representative of the roofing materials manufacturer which will be held before commencing work.
STORAGE OF MATERIALS A.
1.7
Section 07 55 52 – Modified Bitumen Roofing
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Provide roof board, insulation and vapor barrier as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper installation of roofing system.
RELATED SECTION A.
1.4
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
Store roof insulation materials off the ground, covered and fully protected from the weather.
EQUIPMENT A.
Use equipment manufactured, recommended or approved by manufacturer. Do not use equipment which will damage roofing system substrate or exceed the standard capacity of the existing structure. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 22 16 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS A.
Specifications listed below establish standards of quality required, but are not restrictive. Similar and equal roofing insulation by other manufacturers may be substituted, subject to the approval of the Architect’s, the Roofing System Manufacturer and Factory Mutual for use with the roofing system specified in Section 07 55 52 – Modified Bitumen Roofing. 1.
2.2
ROOF BOARD A.
2.3
2.4
Georgia-Pacific DensDeck Prime Roof Board ¼” thick, reinforced gypsum board with coated glass fiber facing, or other Cover Board acceptable by the roofing manufacturer in the specified warranty system. Provide roof board over insulation or where vapor barrier is to be installed over metal deck.
TREATED WOOD A.
Refer to Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for treated wood.
B.
Fasteners for Treated Wood. Use stainless steel fasteners only for treated wood blocking installed as part of the roof system.
VAPOR BARRIER A.
2.5
Flat and tapered rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core, with a 5% recycled content, bonded to glass fiber facers. Federal Specification HH-1-1972/GEN. Factory Mutual - FM Class I Approval for fully adhered single-ply and BUR systems, subject to the conditions of FM Reports J.I.1J2A8.AM and J.I.1M1A5.AM. Meets FM Standard 4450. See current FM Approval Guide. Firestone ISO 95+
V-Force Vapor Barrier Membrane self-adhered vapor barrier/retarder as manufactured by Firestone, with an SBS modified bitumen adhesive on the bottom surface, a tri-laminated woven high density polyethylene layer on the top surface, and a silicone release plastic film protecting the adhesive on the bottom surface. Provide Manufacturer’s recommended primer.
ADHESIVE ATTACHMENT A.
07 22 16 Page 2
Adhesive: Use Firestone I.S.O.SprayTM S, two-part polyurethane adhesive, mixed and dispensed from a heated high-pressure spray, bead-extruding system, or other system approved by manufacturer to meet FM I-60 requirements.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 PART 3 -
3.1
3.4
Remove debris, dirt and loose surfacing to provide a clear, substantially uniform deck for the insulation.
VAPOR BARRIER A.
Install Cover Board over entire surface. Secure board to deck with adhesives in accordance with Roofing Manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual (FM) recommendations. Install to meet IBC and I-60 standards.
B.
Apply primer to cover board according to Manufacturer’s recommendations. Unroll and position barrier onto the substrate with release liner in place for alignment. Do not remove the silicone release liner until the roll is ready for adhesion. Overlap each preceding sheet by 3 in along the sides, following the reference line and 6 in at each end. Stagger end laps a minimum of 12 in. Begin application at the bottom of the slope and overlap in a shingle fashion. Once aligned, peel back a portion of the release liner and press the membrane onto the substrate for initial adherence.
C.
After verifying the complete, uninterrupted, coverage of the area, without holes or gaps, and that the perimeters are terminated where detailed, roll the sheets with a 75-pound roller.
INSULATION A.
3.5
Do not proceed with installation until such defects or conditions have been corrected. Starting installation work on any part of the surface shall imply acceptance of entire surface.
PREPARATION OF DECKS A.
3.3
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE A. Notify the Architect in writing of adverse surface conditions or defects that will prevent proper installation of insulation as specified. Lack of such notification indicates that the contractor accepts the surface as is and shall correct conditions or defects as required by the Roofing Manufacturer to meet requirements for the specified roofing system warranty. B.
3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Lay insulation boards with tight butted joints. Secure first layer with mechanical fasteners per manufacturer’s requirements. Secure additional boards to hold in place with adhesives. If insulation requires more than one (1) layer, offset joints.
ROOF BOARD A.
Lay roof board on top of insulation over the entire surface with tight butted joints. Secure board in place with adhesives in compliance with Roofing Manufacturer's and FM recommendations. Install to meet IBC and I-60 standards. Leave surface ready for roof membrane installation according to Manufacturer’s recommendations. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 22 16 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Do not leave insulation or roof board exposed to the weather.
B.
3.6
PROTECTION A.
Protect applied insulation and completed roofing at all times against damage by roof traffic.
END OF SECTION
07 22 16 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 07 55 52 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Provide hot-applied modified bitumen system, complete with all components required for a watertight and weathertight installation including; but not limited to:
B.
Roof insulation.
C.
Cover Board
D.
Modified bitumen roofing including cap sheet, interply, base sheet, and associated materials.
E.
Base, wall and penetration flashings.
F.
Roof cant strips, traffic pads, and miscellaneous materials.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”
B.
Refer to Division 7 Section “Coping” edge trim/coping.
C.
Refer to Section 07 2216 for roof insulation, roof board, and vapor barrier.
1.4
1.5
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section.
FACTORY MUTUAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Roof materials and installation shall be in strict accordance with minimum FM Global Class 1-60 guidelines as shown in Factory Mutual’s RoofNav and the latest issues of FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, Wind Design, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components. The 6 ft. roof edges and corners shall comply with minimum FM Global Class I-90 and I120 guidelines or be otherwise reinforced in accordance with the referenced guidelines.
B.
The roofing installer shall complete and submit to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative the FM Global Form X2688 “Checklist for Roofing System”. REFERENCE STANDARDS ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A.
References in these specifications to standards, test methods, codes etc., are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications.
B.
American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE). 1.
C.
ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads for buildings and Other Structures.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); Philadelphia, PA (215) 2995585 1.
ASTM D 36-Soften Point of Bitumen (Ring and Ball Apparatus).
2.
ASTM D 41-Asphalt Primmer Used in a Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
3.
ASTM D 312-Asphalt Used in Roofing.
4.
ASTM D 2178-Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
5.
ASTM D 2523-Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes.
6.
ASTM D 2822-Asphalt Roof Cement.
7.
ASTM D 5147-Testing Modified Bitumen Sheet Materials.
8.
ASTM D 6162-Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements.
9.
ASTM D 6164-Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements.
D.
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Norwood, MA (617) 762-4300
E.
International Building Code as published by the International Code Council.
F.
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association; Rosemont, IL (847) 299-9070
G.
OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration; Washington, DC (202) 523-1452
H.
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. Chantilly, VA (703) 803-2980
I.
UL Underwriters Laboratories; Northbrook, IL (708) 272-8800
J.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): Fire Hazard Classification Rating.
07 55 52 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 1.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane: One ply cap sheet membrane, hot mopped to a modified bitumen inter-ply membrane hot mopped to a mechanically attached felt base sheet, cover board applied over rigid insulation, with flashings at all penetrations as well as wall and base flashing.
B.
Base and Wall Flashing: Base and wall flashings shall be products of the same manufacturer as the modified bitumen cap sheet.
C.
Roof Slope: As indicated on drawings.
D.
Roof System Required R-Value: 20, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1.7
SUBMITTALS A.
Prior to roof installation, complete and submit for review and approval, to the Architect, the FM Global Form X2688 “Checklist for Roofing System”.
B.
Product Data: Provide current standard printed product literature indicating characteristics of membrane materials, flashing materials, components, accessories, product specifications and installation instructions. 1.
Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) product data.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit plans of roof showing pitches and locations of details. Submit custom details for every condition, including drains overflow and scuppers, surface mounted counter flashings, equipment base flashings, also showing attachment of extensions and flashings for pipes and vent stacks.
D.
Manufacturer’s Certification, Bulk Bitumen: Submit manufacturer’s certification indicating that bulk bituminous materials delivered to project comply with required standards. Include quantity, statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used. 1.
Include continuous log showing time and temperature for each load of bulk bitumen, indicating date obtained from manufacturer, where held and how transported prior to final heating and application to roof.
E.
Field Test Reports: Submit daily softening point test reports on samples of asphalt used on project, taken at beginning of each day’s work and at 2-hour intervals during course of the work thereafter. Test by Ring and ball Test, ASTM D 36, or similar recognized test method. Submit samples to independent laboratory for testing or perform tests in field, at contractor’s option.
F.
Samples:
ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 3
02/07/18
G.
H.
07 55 52 Page 4
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Submit 12 inch by twelve 12 inch samples of roofing membranes and accessories, with manufacturer's identification labels attached.
2.
Submit representative samples of each type of fastener, insulation and roofing accessory with manufacturer’s identification labels attached.
Certificates: 1.
Code Approvals: Submit written certification of compliance with applicable codes of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Certificate of Analysis: Submit manufacturer’s certificate of analysis for each production run of cap sheet. If a production run is longer than 24 hours, a new lot number shall be assigned and a new Certificate of Analysis shall be generated. Provide the following information on Certificate of Analysis: (a)
Length (in feet).
(b)
Width (in inches).
(c)
Thickness at Selvage (mils).
(d)
Weight (lbs./roll).
(e)
Selvage Width (inches).
(f)
Low Temperature Flexibility (-25 deg. F.), ASTM D 5147 or D 2523.
(g)
Granule Embedment (avg. grams loss/sample), ASTM D 5147.
(h)
Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147.
(i)
Ultimate Elongation (percent).
(j)
Compound Stability (0 or 77 deg. F.), ASTM D 5147.
(k)
Dimensional Stability (percent), ASTM D 5147.
(l)
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147.
(m)
SBS Polymer content percentage and dispersion rate of modified membrane
Application Manual: Submit manufacturer's application manual, which describes completely the preparation of surfaces and application of specified materials, including details to suit all conditions. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
I.
Applicator’s Status: Submit manufacturer's written proof of approved applicators status, submitted by the Manufacturer’s Corporate Office.
J.
Manufacturer’s Letter: Submit letter from the modified bitumen roofing manufacturer confirming the number of years it has directly manufactured the proposed primary roofing system under the trade name and/or trademarks as proposed.
K.
Manufacturer’s History of Installations: Submit a list of 3 installations of the specified roofing system.
L.
Material List: Submit a descriptive list of all component parts of the roofing systems that will be covered under warranty.
M.
Base Sheet Fastening Patterns: Provide drawings of fastener patterns as required to resist specified negative wind pressures, signed and sealed by a registered engineer, licensed in the State of Tennessee.
N.
Delivery Tickets: Provide Contractor and Architect with bills of lading for roofing system products, including bitumen, at time of delivery to the project site.
O.
Roofing Manuals: Submit, in a three-ring binder, all roofing data, including manufacturer’s catalogs/manuals of materials and accessories used in the Project, including manufacturer’s recommendations.
P.
Sample Warranty: Submit a specimen copy of the specified warranty, with a list of all components to be covered.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen, flashings, vapor retarder (if any), and cap sheet produced by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products only as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. Manufacturers complying with the specified criteria shall also comply with the following: 1.
Experience: Shall have been in the business of manufacturing Modified Bitumen roofing membrane systems for a minimum of 5 years.
2.
History of Installations: Shall have installations of the specified roofing system for a minimum of 5 years.
3.
Installer: program.
4.
Manufacturer’s Field Representative: Provide technical representatives (employees) to inspect the installation of the roofing systems as
Manufacturers shall have an on-going approved installer
ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 necessary to assure installation is in accordance with warranty requirements. (a)
Provide written reports of observations and recommendations to the Architect or Engineer on a weekly basis.
B.
Installer: The roofing and associated work shall be contracted to a single firm, called the “Installer” hereafter, specializing in the type of roofing required, so that there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the work.
C.
Installer’s Qualifications:
D.
A single installer shall perform the work of this Section; and shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of roofing systems specified in this section. 1.
Installer Certification: Provide the Owner with written certification from the manufacturer of the roofing system certifying that the installer is approved by the manufacturer for installation of the specified roofing system. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner prior to award of the contract.
2.
Installer’s Field Supervision: Installer must maintain a full-time supervisor/ foreman on the job-site during times that the roofing work is in progress. Supervisor must have minimum of 5 years experience in roofing work specified in this section.
3.
Provide a list of 5 completed projects.
4.
The roofing superintendent shall take readings and temperature of asphalt at point of application.
UL Listing: Provide roofing systems and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure. 1.
E.
07 55 52 Page 6
Provide roof covering materials bearing classification marking (UL) on bundle, package or container indicating that the materials have been produced under UL’s classification and follow-up services.
Testing Agency: The Owner at its option and expense, may select and employ an Independent Roofing Inspection Service specializing in non-destructive evaluations (NDE), for moisture detection purposes, before final acceptance of the roofing systems. Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs deemed necessary to insure any moisture intrusion into the system. Upon completion of any repairs, an additional NDE moisture test shall be to verify compliance. A failure or non-compliance will result in the Contractor being responsible for the cost of the second test plus the cost of additional testing and repairs necessary to insure against moisture intrusion. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 F.
1.9
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Code Compliance. 1.
Building Code: The complete roofing system shall comply with all applicable requirements of required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Wind Resistance: Execute the installation of the roofing system (including insulation and flashings) to comply with wind resistance requirements of applicable building codes for specific negative wind pressures at various building elevations (heights) as indicated on the Drawings.
PRE-INSTALLATI0N MEETING A.
Pre-Installation meeting shall not occur without shop drawings, manufacturers data and manufacturers written instructions and recommendations approved by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect..
B.
Schedule: Convene the Pre-Installation Meeting a minimum of two weeks before starting work of this section.
C.
Required Attendees: 1.
Contractor.
2.
Roofing subcontractor.
3.
Roof System Manufacturer.
4.
Installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work.
5.
Installers of roof-top units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any).
6.
Any other subcontractors associated with roofing work.
7.
Architect.
8.
Owner’s Project Manager, or authorized representative.
9.
Owner’s property staff person who will be responsible for roofing maintenance.
D.
The Contractor shall make arrangements for the meeting and notify the parties required to attend.
E.
Agenda shall include: 1.
Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 7
02/07/18
1.10
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
Review roof system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents).
3.
Review Shop Drawings and associated submittals.
4.
Review manufacturer's technical materials.
5.
Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
6.
Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures.
7.
Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including temporary roofing.
8.
Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of the substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver roofing materials and accessories in manufacturer's original protective containers with labels intact and legible. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for storage and handling. 1.
B.
07 55 52 Page 8
Each pallet, container, or unit shall have the material manufacturer’s name and brand designation clearly listed.
Store materials in dry protected areas, on clean, raised platforms with securely anchored weather protective covering. 1.
Store rolled goods on a clean, flat, dry and elevated surface.
2.
Store material on the roof overnight only for use first thing the next day. Such materials shall be stored on pallets.
3.
Rolls shall be stored on ends on pallets.
4.
Store materials on roof in a manner to prevent overloading of deck.
5.
Store flammable materials away from open flames, sparks or excessive heat.
6.
Cover all materials with polyethylene or other waterproof plastic coverings.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
C.
Handle all materials in a manner to prevent damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Handle rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends.
D.
Damaged Materials: Immediately mark with an “X” of yellow spray paint and remove and replace damaged or improperly stored materials from project site.
E.
Store and handle roofing sheets in a manner that will insure that there is no possibility of moisture pick-up. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weather-tight place, or store properly protected from weather or other moisture sources by leak-proof coverings and/or manufacturer’s original un-opened containers. Do not leave unused felt on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress without proper weather-tight protection.
F.
Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. The installer is responsible for any structural damage occurring due to the storage of materials or equipment on the roof.
G.
All materials shall be stored in locked, watertight trailers or in watertight coverings on roof.
1.11
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.12
Do not permit traffic or material storage on completed roof surfaces. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.
B.
Suspend all application and installation activities during inclement weather. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by the manufacturer.
C.
Protect adjacent building surfaces against damage and bitumen spillage.
D.
Night Seals/Water Cut Offs: Protect roof deck and insulation from moisture by providing water cut-offs at the end of each day's work or when the weather is threatening. Failure to protect the deck insulation and roofing from moisture will require the removal of damaged materials or materials containing excessive moisture. Remove water cut-offs prior to start of new work. 1.
Mop in two-ply sheets.
2.
Do not allow any voids in felt or bitumen. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
E.
1.13
Extend roofing plies at least 12 inches onto prepared area of adjacent roofing. Embed plies into asphalt or adhesive. Strip edges with 12 inch wide ply sheet embedded completely in alternate courses of asphalt.
Water Infiltration: If water infiltrates under or between the roofing plies or insulation during the installation of the roofing system, remove and replace that portion of the roof, including wet insulation. SEQUENCING
A.
1.14
Sequence installation of modified bitumen roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof insulation, flashing, trim, accessories, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent construction activity. SPECIAL WARRANTIES
A.
Total System Warranty by Manufacturer: Provide manufacturer’s Non-Pro Rated 20-year written full warranty, NDL (No Dollar Limit), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. The warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, including exclusions of remedies by the Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Any conditions, exclusions, or limits proposed by the manufacturer must be approved by the Project Consultant and Owner in writing, prior to starting the roof system installation. 1.
B.
Roofing System includes, but is not limited to: Roofing membranes (base, inter, and cap plies as applicable), roof insulation, fasteners, cover and deck boards, accessories, flashing and sheet metal, grounds/nailers, gutters and downspouts, scuttles and vents, curbs, and other components of roofing system.
Total System Warranty by General Contractor: Provide a minimum 5-year warranty, agreeing to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship with the specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. The warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, exclusions of remedies by the Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Any proposed conditions, exclusions, or limits must be approved by the Project Consultant and Owner in writing, prior to the start of roofing system installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.
07 55 52 Page 10
Certainteed Commercial Roofing ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 750 E. Swedesford Road Valley Forge, PA 19482 1-800-359-7298 x 3441 2.
GAF 1361 Alps Road Wayne, NJ 07470 1-800-766-3411
3.
Johns Manville Roofing Systems 717 17th Street Denver, CO 80202 800-341-8032
4.
Soprema Roofing Systems 310 Quadral Dr. Wadsworth, Oh 800-356-3521 330-334-0066 Firestone Lunday & Associates, Inc. P.O. Box 95 717 E. Center Street Sheridan, AR 72150 (888) 942-1463
2.2
MODIFIED BITUMEN CAP AND INTERPLY SHEETS A.
Certainteed System GMS-C-B3, complying with FM Global RoofNav Assembly Number 177080-48958-0 is specified. Subject to compliance with specified requirements and Factory Mutual approval, equivalent products of manufacturers listed in Article 2.1. are acceptable.
B.
Base Sheet: FlexiGlass FR Base, Non-oxidized (flux) asphalt, blended with a compatible elastomeric styrene-butadiene-styrene polymer and selected inert fillers. 1.
Support Mat: Wet process fiber glass mat
2.
Surfacing: Mineral release agent
3.
Dimensions: 39 - 3/8" x 98' 9" (324 square feet)
4.
Thickness: 1.2mm (48 mils) ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 11
02/07/18 C.
D.
E. 2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Modified Bitumen Interply Sheet: Flintglas Ply Sheet, Type 4, or equal complying with ASTM D 2178, Grade IV, UL Type- G1. 1.
Polymer Modifier: SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene).
2.
Reinforcement: Polyester Mat.
3.
Surfacing: Sanded.
4.
Thickness. 0.6 mm (24 mils)
Cap Sheet: Flintlastic GMS, or equal complying with ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type 1. 1.
Application: Hot Asphalt Mopped.
2.
Polymer Modifier: SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene).
3.
Reinforcement: Fiberglass or Polyester.
4.
Color: White
5.
Thickness: 4.0 mm (160 mils)
Base and Wall Flashing Material: 2-ply flashing consisting of one smooth ply and one granular ply, use same material as interply and cap ply membranes. BITUMENOUS MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B.
Hot Asphalt (for installation of modified bitumen interply sheet, and the modified bitumen cap sheet): Comply with ASTM D 312, Type IV, unless otherwise recommended by roofing manufacturer for slope indicated.
C. 2.4
07 55 52 Page 12
1.
Types of Asphalt:
2.
For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT), softening point (SP) and equiviscious temperature (EVT).
Asphalt Roofing Mastic (for general use, except for contact with Modified Bitumen Membranes): ASTM D 2822, Type II. VAPOR BARRIER
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 A.
2.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Where vapor barrier is indicated, or required by project conditions, provide vapor barrier approved by the roofing system manufacturer. The barrier shall in no way negate the system warranty. Provide manufacturer’s recommended primer. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Liquid Applied Reinforced Flashing Systems: Manufacturer’s liquid-applied, reinforced flashing systems should be installed where conditions are not favorable to install SBS modified bitumen flashings. Such conditions may include irregular shapes penetrating roof surfaces, confined areas and low flashing heights. 1.
Where recommended by roofing system manufacturer and required to meet requirements for roof warranty, provide liquid applied flashing systems in lieu of pitch pans and lead pipe flashings.
B.
Prefabricated Cants: Use metal unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner. Refer to Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal.
C.
Roofing Membrane Sealants: Compatible with cap sheet adhesive and furnished by modified bitumen membrane manufacturer.
D.
Ceramic Granules: Provide of same composition, size, and color as the modified bitumen cap sheet membrane. Broadcast into bitumen overruns.
E.
Lead Drain Flashings: 36 inch by 36 inch, formable type, 4 pounds per square foot.
F.
Blocking and Grounds: 1.
Use metal unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner (refer to Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal).
G.
Substrate Joint Tape: 6 inch or 8 inch wide coated rag mat.
H.
Traffic Pads: Cap sheet membrane manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip resistant, surface-textured pads or rolls, .080 inches thick minimum, 28 inches wide minimum. Color shall slightly contrasting with the roof cap sheet for visibility.
2.6
FASTENERS A.
Provide fasteners and plates of type, size, and spacing pattern that are approved by the manufacturer of the modified bitumen roofing system, and in compliance with requirements of Factory Mutual. 1.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel fasteners, washers, and plates. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 13
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
B.
2.7
Do not use mechanical fasteners to attach roofing membranes, except for attachment of base sheet to lightweight insulating concrete, and base and wall flashings.
Base and Wall Flashing Attachment: Flashing plies shall be adhesive attached and mechanically fastened with fasteners approved by the manufacturer and in compliance with requirements of Factory Mutual. PIPE FLASHING
A.
Pipe Penetrations .375” to 2” in Diameter: Furnish and install the Portals Plus Standard Alumi-Flash at all points where up to two pipes .375" - 1" and up to two pipes 1" - 2" in diameter are penetrating the roof.
1.
The Standard Alumi-Flash shall include a.060" spun aluminum base unit with a height of 4" and a base diameter of 14".
2.
The 8 "collared opening shall have two beaded sealing rings roll formed into the top edge.
3.
An EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) compression molded cap model C-212 shall be utilized.
4.
Caps shall include PortalsPlus' stainless steel Snaplock Clamps.
B.
Pipes up to .375 to 12”: Pipe portal accommodates pipe sizes of .375" up to 12". The curb cover is molded from ABS plastic (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) with a laminated acrylic coating, to provide high resistance to both ozone and ultraviolet sun rays, as well as serviceable temperature range of -40F to + 160F. The molded sealing rings on the collared opening of the cover mated with the grooves in the rubber cap as-sures a "Weather-Tite Pressure Seal" and mechanical lock.
C.
Caps for Pipe Roof Penetrations: Compression molded of EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) rubber caps with a serviceable temperature range of 60F to + 270F and high resistance to both ozone and ultraviolet sun rays. Caps with conically shaped steps provides a taut waterproof seal around the pipe. Stainless steel “Snaplock Swivel Action Clamps” protect the pipe seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A.
Verify decks and insulation are dry and free of moisture of any form. 1.
07 55 52 Page 14
Verify proper placement of roof drains and other penetrations. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
B.
3.2
Verify proper securement of penetrating or roof mounted equipment.
Inspect roof perimeters, edges, penetrations and transitions to vertical surfaces to ensure that blocking or grounds have been installed where appropriate and have been secured to comply with design up-lift pressures. ASPHALT
A.
Provide kettle or tanker with clearly visible operating thermometer.
B.
Do not heat asphalt above flash point and EVT recommendations.
C.
Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants shall not be permitted.
D.
Application of asphalt: Uniformly apply applications without voids as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
E.
Types of Asphalt: Refer to 2.4-Bituminous Materials above.
3.3
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A.
Sweep all surfaces prior to commencement of roofing. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for preparation of substrates to receive roofing. Prior to priming, clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing work.
B.
Metal: Metal surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and rough welds and shall be free of moisture, rust, dirt, and other foreign materials.
C.
Priming: Prime both sides of metal flanges (all jacks, prefabricated flashing devices, edge metal, lead drain flashings, etc.) and concrete, masonry, and wood surfaces with a uniform coating of specified primer 24 hours prior to use.
3.4
CANT STRIPS A.
3.5
Install cant strips at transitions of roof membrane with flat vertical surfaces. ROOFING APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases, or fishmouths. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted on the roll during application by “brooming” to ensure prevention of air pockets. Lap seams in the interply layers shall be staggered with the lap seams of the cap sheet. 1.
All layers of roof shall be laid perpendicular to the slope of the deck.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 15
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Asphalt bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equivicous temperature method (EVT Method) as recommended by the NRCA. Do not raise the temperature above the minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (+25 deg. F or 14 deg C, at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen held at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for a period exceeding 3 hours. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT for bitumen, either by suitable, and determine maximum fire-safe handling temperature and do not exceed temperature higher than 25 deg. F. (14 deg. C.) below flash point.
C.
Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping and for other moppings except otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply bitumen at the rate of 25lbs. of asphalt per roof square between piles (+ or – 25 percent on a total job average basis).
D.
Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate substrate joints and enter building or damage insulation or other construction.
3.6
BASE SHEET A.
3.7
Install base sheet with specified fasteners in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements. INTERPLY SHEET
A.
3.8
Install interply sheet to base sheet in a full and uniform coating of asphalt in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE (CAP SHEET)
A.
Granule Embedment: Install cap sheet membrane over interply sheet in a full and uniform coating of hot asphalt compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements.
B.
Broadcast granules over all bitumen overruns on the cap sheet surface while bitumen is still hot.
3.9
WALL AND BASE FLASHINGS A.
Prime metal, concrete, masonry, and wood surfaces prior to flashing application at the minimum rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet.
B.
Securely adhere wall and base flashings with adhesive in compliance manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and requirements of Factory Mutual.
07 55 52 Page 16
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
C.
All loose laps and edges shall be checked and sealed.
D.
Base Flashings: Attach top edge of base flashing membrane with fasteners of type, size, and spacing in complying with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations and requirements of Factory Mutual.
E.
Wall Flashings: The top edge of the wall flashing membrane shall be attached to substrate with termination bar of type, size, and fastener spacing complying with manufacturer’s recommendations and Factory Mutual requirements.
3.10
FLASHING AND STRIPPING A.
Provide manufacturer’s recommended SBS modified bitumen flashing at cant strips, other sloping and vertical surfaces, roof edges, and curbs through the roof. Provide one ply of manufacturer’s recommended SBS modified bitumen flashing. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of flashing to vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer or primary roofing materials and one ply of interplay turned up the roof. Modified bitumen flashing shall be granular surfaced (white).
B.
Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim, which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3’-0” in length.
C.
Penetration Flashing: Comply with roofing manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for materials used and method of installation as required to suit field conditions and meet warranty requirements.
3.11
RELATED COMPONENTS-INSTALLATION A.
Refer to the appropriate specification section for roofing components integrated into the roofing membrane assembly.
B.
Sealant: All modified bitumen cap sheet edges exposed at edge metal, equipment supports, and items penetrating roof shall be caulked with a smooth continuous bead of sealant approved by roofing manufacturer and compatible with substrates being sealed.
3.12
ROOF DRAIN INSTALLATIONS A.
Prime drain flashing and allow to cure prior to installation.
B.
Install specified insulation at drains to form uniform sumps as indicated.
C.
Extend membranes and flashings under the clamping ring.
D.
Secure clamping rings using bolts supplied by drain manufacturer. ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 17
02/07/18 E. 3.13
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Trim edges of membrane at the inside of drains. TRAFFIC PAD INSTALLATION
A.
3.14
Install traffic pad products in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated; place continuous around all roof equipment, fans, etc., continuous from point of roof access to roof equipment, fans, etc. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
B.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
3.15
JOB COMPLETION A.
Inspect completed roofing and correct all defects to meet the specification requirements.
B.
Manufacturer's representative shall inspect the completed roofing system and notify the Architect of defects, if any, in the application.
3.16
CLEANING A.
Remove debris and clean roof deck and site on a daily basis and legally dispose at an approved disposal site.
B.
Clean any drippage or spills of asphalt or primers as work progresses. Remove drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces
C.
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions.
D.
Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by the work of this Section.
3.17
07 55 52 Page 18
TESTING
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 A.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Unless this requirements is specifically waived by the Owner, test the modified bitumen roof as follows: 1.
Plug roof drains.
2.
Flood the roof to a minimum depth of 2 inches above the drain clamp ring. Do not exceed a height of 2 inches below the top of any affected flashings, including walls, curbs, vents, stacks and other items penetrating the roof.
3.
Water shall remain for a period of two (2) hours.
4.
Each roof drain shall be allowed to drain its area. Drain areas one at a time until the entire roof is trained.
B.
In addition to the installer, the test shall be conducted in the presence of the General Contractor, Manufacturer’s Representative, Owner’s Representative and the Architect. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall submit a written report that the roof drained properly and no leaking occurred as a result of this testing.
C.
Should improper drainage or leakage occur the corrections to the roof membrane shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required to comply with the manufacturer’s requirements for warranty.
3.18
PROTECTION A.
Restrict construction traffic and equipment movement on the completed roofing to only essential personnel. Provide appropriate protection against traffic and construction activities on completed roofs.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
07 55 52 Page 19
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
07 55 52 Page 20
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections apply to this section. SUMMARY
A.
Provide metal doors and frames as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work, including frames for framed window openings and solid core wood doors.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
2.
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping.
3.
Division 8 Sections “Glazing” and “Overhead Sectional Doors”.
4.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions.
5.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, and construction details. 1.
B.
For products having recycled content, include documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1.
Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
2.
Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 11 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
C. 1.5
Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 and A250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Fire Rated Assemblies:
C. 1.6
1.
Fabricate assemblies as tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratories or other nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 80.
3.
Provide doors tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL10B.
4.
Identify each assembly with factory applied label indicating applicable fire rating.
Comply with ANSI/SDI 250 and SDI 107 for thickness of hardware reinforcing. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factoryfinished doors and frames.
B.
Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work that are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.
C.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
08 11 00 Page 2
Steel Doors and Frames ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
2.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02 a.
Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
b.
Copco Door Co.
c.
Curries Company.
d.
Kewanee Corporation.
e.
Pioneer Industries Inc.
f.
Republic Builders Products.
g.
Steelcraft; a Division of Ingersoll-Rand.
h.
Amweld Building Products, Inc.
MATERIALS A.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, mill phosphatized.
D.
Anchor Bolts, Fasteners and Screws: Manufacturer's standard type, except cadmium or zinc plated finish. Stainless steel also acceptable.
E.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand and water; with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at seven days.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Zero VOC Coal Tar Epoxy, Progress Epoxy Polymers, or equal.
2.3
DOORS A.
General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSISDI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1.
Grade and Model: Grade III, Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 2, 16 gauge minimum (Full Flush - Composite Construction).
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 11 00 Page 3
02/07/18 C.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSIA250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1.
D.
E.
2.4
Grade and Model: (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 3 (Seamless). ANSI/SDI-100 Grade III, (16 gauge), galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 on all surfaces and insulated.
Cores: 1.
Interior: Resin impregnated kraft paper honeycomb.
2.
Exterior: Manufacturers standard insulated core.
3.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Mineral fiberboard.
Temperature-Rise Limit: At. exit enclosures and exit passageways (stairways), provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 def F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. FRAMES
A.
General: Provide welded steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Frames: 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet.
C.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
D.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1.
E.
2.5
Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. FABRICATION
A.
08 11 00 Page 4
General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Frames: Provide welded frames at all areas. Hot-dip galvanize exterior frames. Comply with ASTM A123 for A60 galvanized coating. Galvanize after fabrication and assembly.
C.
Pairs of Doors: Pairs of labeled “fire-rated” doors shall have Z-astragal. Non-rated doors do not require astragal.
D.
Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
E.
Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from the following material cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards.
G.
Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge.
H.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
I.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
J.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.
K.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A 250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1.
L.
M.
For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Grind and dress exposed welds smooth.
2.
Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
Glass Molding and Stops:
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 11 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Provide doors containing vision lites with hollow metal moldings to secure the glazing. Fixed moldings shall be welded on the security side. Loose stops with butt corners shall be provided. Stops shall be either snap-on or screwed into place with cadmium or zinc coated countersunk screws.
N.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
O.
Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, comply with Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
2.6
FINISHES A.
Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A244.1 for acceptance criteria, except door frames identified as having only galvanized finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated assemblies.
B.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
C.
3.2
08 11 00 Page 6
1.
In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. At fire rated masonry walls coat inside of frames with bituminous paint and fully grout.
2.
In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
3.
For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A.
Prime-Coat Touch-p: Immediately after installation, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B.
Test doors for smooth operation. Adjust as required to achieve smooth operation.
C.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08 11 00
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 11 00 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
08 11 00 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/08/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to work of this section. SUMMARY
B.
Provide aluminum entrances framing, complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.
C.
Related sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part of aluminum entrance and framing systems.
2.
Division 8 Section "Glazing."
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
General: Provide aluminum entrance systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated, without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this project. Failure includes framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by structural movement.
B.
Glazing: Physically isolate glazing from framing members.
C.
Wind Loads: Provide entrance systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. 1.
D.
Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated.
Structural Silicone Sealant Joints: Provide systems with structural silicone-sealant joints complying with the following requirements: 1.
Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a.
Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 41 13 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 b.
E.
Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category.
Dead Loads: Provide entrance system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. 1.
Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.
2.
Provide a minimum of 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) clearance between members and operable doors.
F.
Live Loads: Provide entrance systems complete, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
G.
Air Infiltration: Provide entrance systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s/sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75.2 Pa).
H.
Water Penetration: Provide entrance systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). Water leakage is defined as follows:
I.
Thermal Movements: Provide entrance systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects. 1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
J.
Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.
K.
Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For entrance systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joinery, anchorage, glazing and provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work.
08 41 13 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/08/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
C.
Samples: Submit samples of specified finish and color for Architects verification. If color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Installer Certificate: Certificate signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B.
Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum."
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
1.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2.
Adhesive sealant failures.
3.
Cohesive sealant failures.
4.
Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
5.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
6.
Failure of operating components to function normally.
7.
Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.
Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 41 13 Page 3
02/07/18 1.8
MSCAA 14-1386-02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS/SYSTEMS A.
B.
2.2
Kawneer 350, medium stile doors are specified, equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1.
CMI Architectural Products Inc.
2.
Efco Corporation
3.
Tubelite Architectural Systems.
4.
YKK AP America
Model/Dimensions: Provide Kawneer 500 wide stile entrance doors, or equivalent product of specified manufacturers. Stile and rail dimensions shall be as follows: 1.
Vertical Stile: 5 inches
2.
Top Rail: 5 inches
3.
Bottom Rail: 5 inches
MATERIALS A.
08 41 13 Page 4
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4.
Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
5.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/08/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
C.
Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements.
F.
Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
G.
Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
H.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
2.3
COMPONENTS A.
Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard thickness for specified door model, with extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods. 1.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets.
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
D.
1.
Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
2.
Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 41 13 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows: 1.
2.4
Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements.
HARDWARE A.
2.5
General: Heavy duty hardware required for proper operation of doors entrance doors will be provided by hardware supplier. Refer to Door Hardware section. FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1.
Fabricate components for head- and sill-receptor frame construction with shear-block construction at intermediate horizontal components.
B.
Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing.
C.
Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D.
Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
E.
Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
F.
Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
G.
Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
H.
Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. 1.
08 41 13 Page 6
Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/08/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C.
Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Provide doors finished in clear or anodic color as selected by Architect.
D.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-MC10C21A41 Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.7 mils or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
B.
Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants.
E.
Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 41 13 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
F.
Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Erection Tolerances: Install entrance systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
3.3
1.
Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2.
Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
3.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and weathertight closure.
B.
Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.
3.4
PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Owner, manufacturer and Installer, that ensures entrance systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
08 41 13 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Provide door hardware as required to adequately equip all openings throughout the building for proper operation. Furnish hardware not specified, but obviously required for completion of the project, conforming to size, function, quality, and utility of other hardware specified. Provide commercial door hardware; including but not limited to: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Electrified hardware. 3. Integrated access control hardware.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Division 5: Glazed Decorative Metal Railings and Glass Gates 2. Division 8: Steel Doors and Frames. 3. Division 8: Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. 4. Division 8: Sliding Door Entrances. 5. Division 8: Full Glass Doors 6. Division 26: Electrical 7. Division 27: Communications.
C.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Permanent key cores, keying, and keys by Owner. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 1
02/07/18 1.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: following:
Details of electrified and access control hardware, indicating the
1. System Block Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following for each unique electrified opening: a. Point-to-point system wiring and riser diagrams. b. Elevation diagram of each door. c. Operational description. C.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 08 71 00 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions including, but not limited to, the following situations: normal secured/unsecured state of door; authorized access; authorized egress; unauthorized access; unauthorized egress; fire alarm and loss of power conditions. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
1.4
D.
Keying Schedule: Prepared and coordinated under the supervision of the Owner. Owner to approve all lock functions prior to the ordering of permanent locks and cylinders.
E.
Hardware Submittal shall be embossed or have the imprint of a Certified, up to date, Seal stamp.
F.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
G.
Fire-Rated Door Assembly Testing: Per NFPA80, submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who has completed both standard and electrified Builders hardware and integrated access control installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. Supplier recognized by manufacturers to be a direct, factory-authorized distributor of the specified hardware products. 1. Access Control and Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced access control systems integrator who is or employs a qualified Physical Security Professional available during the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect and Owner about integrated access control and security systems. Supplier recognized as an authorized distributor and installer by the manufacturer of primary materials. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 3
02/07/18 C.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), active in the DHI Continuing Education Program with an up to date Seal, and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Go to http://www.dhi/org/ to search list for local Architectural Hardware Consultants. 1. Access Control Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by ASIS as a Physical Security Professional (PSP) and who is experienced in providing on site consulting services for electrified door hardware and integrated access control installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of aluminum, steel and wood door hardware from the same single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide standard door hardware, electrified hardware and access control hardware as a single sourced package from the same qualified supplier.
E.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2-inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
08 71 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2-inch high. 3. International Building Code IBC2012.
F.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing per NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. 1. To ensure compliance with Positive Pressure criteria as required by UBC7-2, UL10C, NFPA5000 and all applicable Local, State and National Code Jurisdictions, all Doors and Frames should be checked for accurate installation per Manufacturers installation instructions to provide proper fire and Smoke Gasketing as tested and listed using a PL2 Frame Set or similar Tool.
G.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Review and verify lock function for every opening. 3. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 4. Requirements for key control system. 5. Coordinate installation of permanent keys and cylinder cores by Owner. 6. Address for delivery of additional cylinders or keying products.
H.
Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site attended by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper hardware installation methods and the procedures for receiving and handling hardware. At completion of installation, provide written certification that hardware items were applied per conference recommendations and to finish hardware specifications. 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 5
02/07/18
1.6
1.7
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
COORDINATION A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard, electrified and access control hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Access Control and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware and fire alarm system.
WARRANTY A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of standard, electrified hardware and access control hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Special Warranty Periods: Five years for mortise and bored latches and locksets, five years for exit devices, ten years for manual door closers, and two years for electromechanical door hardware.
08 71 00 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18 E.
1.8
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Extended Warranty: Provisions for a separate optional extended warranty and maintenance contract is required for the access control system and power assist operated openings. Version upgrades and "fix" releases to the software, beyond the general warranty time period, are available at no extra charge only if the end user is under a valid extended warranty and maintenance contract.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware and integrated access control systems suppliers and installers. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated for named products listed in Hardware Sets. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified and access control hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. (Source manufacturer listed in boldface).
2.2
HINGES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Continuous Geared Hinges: a. National Guard Products (NGP). ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 b. Owner Preferred – No Substitution.
B.
Standards: BHMA Certified products complying with the following: 1. Continuous Geared Hinges: BHMA A156.26.
C.
Continuous-Geared Hinges: Minimum 0.120-inch thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame. Fabricate hinges non-handed and to template screw locations. Continuous hinges guaranteed for the life of the opening. 1. Electrical Transfer Hinge: Provide electric transfer continuous hinges with a 12" removable hinge modification accessible without de-mounting door from the frame and Molex™ standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Five-year warranty required.
D. 2.3
Provide mortar guard enclosure at each electrical hinge location specified.
DOOR BOLTS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flush Bolts, Surface Bolts and Coordinators: a. Trimco Manufacturing (TRI). b. Burns Manufacturing (BUR). c. Ives Hardware - Allegion (IVE).
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3. 2. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
C.
Flush Bolts: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
D.
Provide manual flush bolts with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors.
E.
Provide Keyed Flush Bolts as identified in Hardware Sets.
F.
Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch throw.
08 71 00 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18 2.4
MSCAA 14-1386-02
LOCKS AND LATCHES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mechanical Mortise Locks and Latches: a. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) – 8800 Series. b. DORMA Architectural Hardware, a division of dormakaba (DOR) – M9083 Series as listed in Hardware Sets. c. Adams Rite, and Assa Abloy Company (ADM) – 1877 Series. d. No Substitution – Match Existing Only. 2. Mechanical Bored Locks and Latches: a. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) – 5400 Series. b. No Substitution – Match Existing Only. 3. Padlocks: a. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) – PD2521-1/2 Series. b. No Substitution – Match Existing Only.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following 1. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
C.
Bored Locks: BHMA Certified Grade 1, Series 4000.
D.
Lock Trim: Match the following design style: 1. Lever: Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) – AU Trim.
E.
Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: 1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13. 2. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 9
02/07/18 F.
2.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1.
Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.
2.
Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.
3.
Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.
G.
Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Knurl all knobs or levers to mechanical rooms, electrical rooms or closets, and all other hazardous or dangerous areas. Fire Exit Stair Door Hardware shall not be knurled.
ELECTRIFIED LOCKS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical locksets, provide products by one of the following: 1. Electromechanical Cylindrical Locks: a. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) - 5491 Series. b. No Substitution – Match Existing Only. 2. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified lock options including: outside door trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.
2.6
CYLINDERS AND KEYING A.
Coordinate with Owner to provide Yale LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Cylinders. The End User is required to have the ability for on-site cylinder pinning and original key cutting.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: a. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware, an Assa Abloy Company (YAL) Cylinders. b. No Substitution – Match Existing Only.
C.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.
08 71 00 Page 10
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2. Key Control System: BHMA A156.5.
D.
Cylinder Grade: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
E.
Permanent Cores: Coordinate with Owner for LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” bit; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
F.
Construction Keying: Coordinate with Owner for LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” bit.
G.
Keying System: Coordinate with Owner for LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” bit. 1. New keying by Owner.
2.7
H.
Keys: Provide three (3) SA 6 pin “0” bit keys per lock and cylinder as directed by Owner.
I.
Key Control System: Provide one MMF Industries lockable cabinet for key control and storage. Cabinet to provide for 50% future expansion as directed by Owner.
STRIKES A.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
B.
2.8
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.
EXIT DEVICES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Exit Devices: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware, a division of dormakaba (DOR) - 9000 Series. b. No Substitution without Architect Approval. 2. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction, electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm, delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 11
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 touchbar monitoring and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure.
2.9
B.
Standard: BHMA A156.3.
C.
Exit Devices: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
D.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing per UL 305.
E.
Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing per UL 305 and NFPA 252.
F.
Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install concealed vertical rod exit devices as indicated in Hardware Sets.
G.
Outside Trim: Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Coordinators: a. Trimco Manufacturing (TRI). b. Burns Manufacturing (BUR). c. Ives Hardware - Allegion (IVE).
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.
C.
2.10
Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing per UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested.
CLOSERS and POWER OPERATORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers (Heavy Duty):
08 71 00 Page 12
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 a. LCN Door Closers - Allegion (LCN) - 4041 Series with heavy duty arms. b. No Substitution – Only as indicated in Hardware Sets. 2. Closer Holder Release (Detector) Devices: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware, a division of dormakaba (DOR) – 1816HT Series. b. No Substitution – Only as indicated in Hardware Sets. 3. Power Assist Operators: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware, a division of dormakaba (DOR) – ED900 Series. b. LCN Door Closers – Allegion (LCN) – 9000 Series.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. 2. Power Operators: BHMA A156.19.
2.11
C.
Surface Closers: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
D.
Power Operators: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
E.
Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide non-handed, factory-sized closers adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. Unless otherwise indicated, all door closers are to be mounted inside rooms not visible from a corridor or lobby.
F.
Closer Options: As indicated in hardware sets, or required for proper installation, provide door closer options including: delayed action, hold open arms, extra duty parallel arms, positive stop/hold open arms, compression stop/hold open arms, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates. Through bolt type mounting is required as indicated in the door hardware sets.
G.
Power assist operators as surface mounted, electric low energy type conforming to ANSI A156.19 requirements and capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 guideline. Outputs and relays on board in the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.
OPERATING and PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 13
02/07/18 A.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Trimco Manufacturing (TRI). b. Burns Manufacturing (BUR). c. Ives Hardware - Allegion (IVE).
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
C.
Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Brass/ Bronze Stainless Steel: .050 inches thick, beveled four sides (B4E) with countersunk screw holes.
2.12
D.
Push-Pull Design: Minimum 1" Round with 8" Centers. Provide 90-degree offset pulls at exterior openings.
E.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in door hardware sets.
F.
Furnish protection plates sized two inches less than door width (LDW) on push side and by height specified in door hardware sets.
STOPS AND BUMPERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: a. Trimco Manufacturing (TRI). b. Burns Manufacturing (BUR). c. Ives Hardware - Allegion (IVE).
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.
C.
Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Certified Grade 1.
D.
Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
08 71 00 Page 14
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18 E.
2.13
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. Provide (3) per single door and (2) per paired door frame.
DOOR THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Door Thresholds, Weatherstripping and Gasket Seals: a. National Guard Products (NGP). b. Reese Products (REE). c. Zero International (ZER).
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
C.
General: Provide continuous weatherstrip seal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where specified. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Install header seal before mounting door closer arms. 2. Meeting Stile Astragals: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Sweep: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
D.
Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing per UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
E.
Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing per UL-10C. 1. Intumescent Seals and Gasketing: Provide concealed, Category A type gasketing systems on assemblies only where an intumescent seal is required by Door Manufacturer to meet IBC and UL-10C positive pressure labeling.
2.14
SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 15
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1. K. N. Crowder Manuracturing, Inc. (KNC). 2. Haefele Manufacturing (HAF). 3. Richards-Wilcox, Inc. (RIW).
2.15
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.14.
C.
Sliding Barn Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track, hangers, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated.
stops,
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B.
Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosures; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems. 1. Boxed Power Supplies: a. As required for Warranty by Hardware Product Manufacturer. b. As required for Access Control by Owner/Security Contractor only.
2.16
FABRICATION A.
2.17
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws per manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
FINISHES A.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case, less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
D.
Finishes on locksets, latchsets and exit devices to incorporate an FDA recognized antimicrobial coating (AM) listed for use on medical and food preparation equipment that will suppress the growth and spread of a broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew.
E.
BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:
08 71 00 Page 16
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1. BHMA 600: Primed for painting, over steel base metal. 2. BHMA 613: Dark-oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed, over bronze base metal. 3. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 4. BHMA 695: Dark bronze painted, over any base metal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance using a PL2 Frame Set or similar Tool.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
PREPARATION A.
Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A115 series.
B.
Electrified Openings: Provide steel doors and frames prepared to receive electrified hardware connections specified in Door Hardware Sets without additional modification.
INSTALLATION A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
3.4
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and re-installation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
C.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 17
02/07/18 A.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Field Inspection: Secure the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect all swinging doors and hardware immediately following completion of installation and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from specifications or construction document requirements. a. Inspection Scope: 1) Inspect all swinging doors and door hardware. 2) Inspector to furnish a Field Quality Report, itemized per each individual opening, to the Architect within 7 days of the inspection, including: a) Deficiencies in workmanship and standard industry practices. b) Use of allowable products. c) Use of manufacturer recommended fasteners. d) Compliance with the ADA. f) Problems related to function, security, aesthetics, or maintenance. b. Inspector Qualifications: 1) Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2) Entirely independent of the supply side of the project, having no familial or financial relationship with any manufacturer, manufacturer's representative, distributor, installer or supplier used on this project. 3) Full-time (40 hours per week) engaged in the writing of hardware specifications and on-site inspections. 4) Approved by Architect. Go to http://www.dhi/org/ to search list for local Architectural Hardware Consultants.
B.
08 71 00 Page 18
Field Inspection: Secure the services of an Access Control System Consultant to perform a final inspection of installed access control door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 1. Access Control System Consultant will inspect integrated electronic and access control hardware and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether electronic and access control hardware is properly installed and performing per system operational descriptions. ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 a. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. b. Pre-testing: Program and adjust the system and pretest all components, wiring, and functions to verify they conform to specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new items. c. Acceptance Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pre-testing has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 2 weeks. d. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.
3.5
ADJUSTING A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assembly Testing: Upon completion of the installation, each fire door assembly in the project shall be tested to confirm proper operation of its closing device and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly as per current NFPA80 Edition. The inspection of the fire doors is to be performed by individuals with knowledge and understanding of the operation components of the type of door being subjected to testing who are acceptable by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project, and include each door number, and itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.
C.
Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 19
02/07/18 3.6
3.7
3.8
MSCAA 14-1386-02
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Secure the services of a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
B.
Secure the services of a Certified Fire Door Assembly Inspector to complete inspection requirements per NFPA 80 2007 Chapter 5.2.
DOOR HARDWARE SETS A.
The hardware sets listed below represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process.
HARDWARE SETS Hardware Set #001 – Exterior Entry – Delayed Egress – Card Reader Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 2 Each 1 Each 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Rim Cylinder Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Weather Strip Position Switch Silencer Card Reader Door Bell Video Intercom
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 UL DE9300 x LM/MS BP x YR09 x LFSC x Less Cylinder PS532RF K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” A626A MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings
628 630 600 626 626 689 630 628 628 Black Grey
NGP DOR DOR YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. 08 71 00 Page 20
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device Trim and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Door Bell and Intercom communication with Office WD100 will allow request for ingress authorization. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual key override allowed by outside key cylinder. Egress allowed at all time. Hardware Set #002 – Exterior Entry – Delayed Egress – Card Reader Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 2 Each
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Rim Cylinder Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Weather Strip Position Switch Silencer Card Reader
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 UL DE9300 x LM/MS BP x YR09 x LFSC x Less Cylinder PS532RF K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” A626A MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings
628 630 600 626 626 689 630 628 628 Black Grey
NGP DOR DOR YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device Trim and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual key override allowed by outside key cylinder. Egress allowed at all time.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 21
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #003 – Exterior – Delayed Egress – Emergency Exit Only Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Weather Strip Position Switch Silencer Alarm Signage
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 UL DE9300 LM/MS BP no outside trim PS532RF K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” A626A MC-4 1229A Emergency Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
628 630 600 626 689 630 628 628 Black Grey
NGP DOR DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Un-authorized exit will trigger alarm. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual Shunt of Alarm is required at Exit Device or electronically by Security. Hardware Set #004 – Exterior Entry – Auto Opening Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1Set 1 Set 2 Each 2 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Auto Opener Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Weather Strip Position Switch Push Switch
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 9100MLR x LB x LM/MS BP x YR09 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit ED900J K0050 10” x 35” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” A626A 7284 MC-4 WS-1 SQ4
628 630 613 689 630 628 628 628 Black 630
NGP DOR YAL DOR TRI NGP NGP NGP DOR DOR
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings and Electrical. Operational Description: Activation of HC Push Switch inside and/or outside retracts both Exit Device latchbolts momentarily and then activates both Automatic Openers to allow assisted ingress and/or egress. Exit Devices re-latch when the doors return to their full closed position. Exit Devices powered by ED900 Auto Opener. Manual key override allowed by outside key cylinder. Egress allowed at all time.
08 71 00 Page 22
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #004.1 – Vestibule – Card Reader Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1Set 1 Set 2 Each 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Gasket Position Switch Card Reader
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 9100MLR x LB x LM/MS BP x YR09 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 35” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” 5050B 7284 MC-4 Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings
628 630 613 689 630 628 628 Brown Black
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP DOR
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Reader in Vestibule will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device Trim and shunt alarm for ingress. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual key override allowed by outside cylinder. Egress allowed at all time. Hardware Set #005 – Exterior Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 9300 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 36” B4E 601A 36” A626A 3684 896 36”
628 630 626 689 630 628 628 Alum
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP
628 630 626 689 630 628 628 Alum
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP 08 71 00 Page 23
Hardware Set #005.1 – Exterior Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 9300 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 36” B4E 601A 36” A626A 3684 896 36” ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #006 – Exterior Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Door Sweep Astragal Weather Strip Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 9100 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 601A 36” 9600A 84” A626A 7284 896 36”
628 630 626 689 628 628 628 Alum
NGP DOR YAL LCN NGP NGP NGP NGP
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 9100 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” A626A 7284 896 36”
628 630 626 689 630 628 628 628 Alum
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP NGP
D628 626 626 689 630 628 628 Grey Alum
NGP YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP TRI NGP
Hardware Set #006.1 – Exterior Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Weather Strip Threshold
Hardware Set #007 – Exterior Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 3 Each 1 Each
08 71 00 Page 24
Hinge Lockset Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Weather Strip Silencer Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 AUE8867FL x Less Cylinder K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 42” B4E 601A 36” A626A 3684 1229A 896 36”
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #008 – Exterior – Exit Only Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Weather Strip Silencer Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 AUE8835FL x no outside trim 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 42” B4E 601A 36” A626A 3684 1229A 896 36”
D628 626 689 630 628 628 Grey Alum
NGP YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP TRI NGP
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 AUE8867FL x Less Cylinder K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” A626A 7284 1229A 896 72”
628 626 626 626 689 630 628 628 628 Grey Alum
NGP TRI YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP TRI NGP
268 626 600 626 689 630 628 628 Brown Grey 613
NGP TRI TRI YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP TRI TRI
Hardware Set #009 – Exterior Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 1 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 2 Each 1 Each
Hinge Flush Bolt Lockset Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Weather strip Silencer Threshold
Hardware Set #010 – Mechanical – Rated Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 1 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 2 Each 2 Each
Hinge Auto Flush Bolt Coordinator Lockset Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Gasket Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 UL 3810 UL 3094B2 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” UL 9600A 84” UL 5050B 7284 UL 1229A 1270WV
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 25
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #011 – Electrical Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Weather Strip Threshold
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 UL F9100 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” UL 9600A 84” UL 5050B 7284 896 36”
628 630 626 689 630 628 628 Brown Alum
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP NGP
628 630 626 689 630 628 Brown Grey
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP TRI
628 630 600 626 689 630 628 Brown Black Grey
NGP DOR DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Hardware Set #012 – Electrical – Rated Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 3 Each
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 UL F9300 x YR08 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” UL 5050B 3684 UL 1229A
Hardware Set #013 – Corridor – Delayed Egress – Emergency Exit Only Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each 1 Each
08 71 00 Page 26
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader Alarm Signage
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 UL DE9300 LM/MS BP no outside trim PS532RF K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Emergency Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Reader will allow momentary release of Exit Device and shunt alarm for egress. Un-authorized exit will trigger Delay Egress alarm. Exit Device will allow exit after set time delay. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual Shunt of Alarm is required at Exit Device or electronically by Security. Hardware Set #014 – Lobby Corridor – Delayed Egress Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 2 Each 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Rim Cylinder Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader Sign
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 DE9300 x LM/MS BP x YR09 x LFSC x Less Cylinder PS623RF K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
628 61630 600 626 626 695 630 628 Brown Black Grey
NGP DOR DOR YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Un-authorized egress will activate alarm and pre-set delay. Although the system is alarmed, egress is allowed at all time. Manual key override available in outside Exit Device Trim. Hardware Set #014.1 – Corridor – Delayed Egress Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each
Hinge Exit Device Power Supply Rim Cylinder Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 DE9300 x LM/MS BP x YR09 x LFSC x Less Cylinder PS623RF K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E ADDENDUM NO. 2
628 61630 600 626 626 695 630
NGP DOR DOR YAL YAL LCN TRI 08 71 00 Page 27
02/07/18 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 2 Each 1 Each
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Door Sweep Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader Sign
601A 36” 5050B 3684 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
628 Brown Black Grey
NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Un-authorized egress will activate alarm and pre-set delay. Although the system is alarmed, egress is allowed at all time. Manual key override available in outside Exit Device Trim. Hardware Set #015 – Lobby Corridor – Delayed Egress Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each
Hinge Hinge Auto Flush Bolts Exit Device
1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Each
Power Supply Rim Cylinder Mortise Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader Sign
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 (LHRB) Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 (RHRB) 3810 (RHRB inactive leaf only) DE9300 x LM/MS BP x YR09 x LFSC x Less Cylinder (LHRB active leaf only) PS623RF K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” 5050B 7284 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
628 628 626 61630
NGP NGP TRI DOR
600 626 626 695 630 628 628 Brown Black Grey
DOR YAL YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Exit Device and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Exit Device will relock when door returns to the full close position. Un-authorized egress will activate alarm and pre-set delay. Although the system is alarmed, egress is allowed at all time. Manual key override available in outside Exit Device Trim. 08 71 00 Page 28
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #016 – Mechanical Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 1 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 2 Each 1 Each 1 Each
Hinge Flush Bolt Alarm Exit Device Power Supply Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Weather strip Silencer Card Reader Sign
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 8300 x BPAR x no outside trim ES103 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” A626A 7284 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings Exit Only Alarm Will Sound – by Owner
628 626 689 600 689 630 628 628 628 Grey
NGP TRI DOR DOR LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary shunt of Exit Device alarm for ingress egress. Alarm will re-arm after pre-set time delay when door returns to the full close position. Although egress is always allowed, un-authorized egress will activate alarm. Hardware Set #017 – Card Reader Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Power Supply Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 B-AU5491LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit by Owner/Security Contractor 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings
628 626
NGP YAL
689 630 628 Brown Black Grey
LCN TRI NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Lockset and shunt alarm for ingress and/or egress. Lockset will relock when door ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 29
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
returns to the full close position. Manual key override available in outside Lever. Although the system is alarmed, egress is allowed at all time. Hardware Set #018 – Roof – Card Reader Single 3’0” x 4’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Power Supply Door Sweep Gasket Position Switch Silencer Card Reader
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 x ETW8 B-AU5491LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit by Owner/Security Contractor 601A 36” 5050B 3648 MC-4 1229A Coordinate with Division 27 and D Series Drawings
628 626
NGP YAL
628 Brown Black Grey
NGP NGP DOR TRI
Note: All wire, wiring, coordination to all Local Life Safety and Building Code requirements per Division 27 and D Series Drawings. Operational Description: Presentation of authorized electronic credentials at Card Readers will allow momentary unlock of Lockset and shunt alarm for access to Roof. Lockset will relock when door returns to the full close position. Manual key override available in inside Lever. Egress to be allowed at all time from the Roof. Hardware Set #019 – Corridor/Break Room – Rated Pair 6’0” x 9’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Set 1 Set 2 Each 2 Each
08 71 00 Page 30
Hinge Exit Device Rim Cylinder Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Astragal Gasket Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 9100 x YR03 x Less Cylinder K640 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 9600A 84” 5050B 7284 1229A 1270WV
ADDENDUM NO. 2
628 630 6626 689 630 628 629 Brown Grey 626
NGP DOR YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP NGP TRI TRI
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #020 – Storage/Mechanical Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 3 Each
Hinge Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
628 626 689 Grey
NGP YAL LCN TRI
628 626 689 Grey 626
NGP YAL LCN TRI TRI
628 626 Grey 626
NGP YAL TRI TRI
628 626 689 628 Brown Grey 626
NGP YAL LCN NGP NGP TRI TRI
Hardware Set #021 – Storage/Mechanical/File Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Door Closer Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A 1270WV
Hardware Set #022 – Storage/Mechanical/File Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 1229A 1270WV
Hardware Set #023 – Storage/Mechanical/File - Rated Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Door Closer Door Sweep Gasket Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 601A 36” UL 5050B 7284 UL 1229A 1270WV
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 31
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #024 – Storage/Mechanical Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
Hinge Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
Hardware Set #024.1 – Storage/Mechanical Pair 8’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
Hinge Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 B-AU5405LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
Hardware Set #025 – Entry/Office Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
Hinge Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
Hardware Set #025.1 – Entry/Office Pair 8’0” x 8’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
08 71 00 Page 32
Hinge Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #025.2 – Entry/Office Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
Hinge Auto Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3810 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
628 626 626 689 Grey
NGP TRI YAL LCN TRI
628 626 Grey 626
NGP YAL TRI TRI
628 626 689 Grey 626
NGP YAL LCN TRI TRI
Hardware Set #025.3 – Entry/Office Pair 6’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” AL x AL Each opening to have: 2 Each 1 Set 1 Each 2 Each 3 Each
Hinge Flush Bolts Lockset Door Closer Silencer
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 3917-12 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A
Hardware Set #026 – Entry/Office Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 1229A 1270WV
Hardware Set #027 – Entry/Office Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Lockset Door Closer Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 B-AU5404LN x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit 4040 Cush 1229A 1270WV
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 33
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #028 – Privacy Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Privacy Set Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Coat Hook Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 AU5425LN K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 3071-1 1229A 1270WV
628 626 630 628 Brown 626 Grey 626
NGP YAL TRI NGP NGP TRI TRI TRI
628 626 689 630 628 Brown Grey 626
NGP YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP TRI TRI
628 626 689 630 628 Brown 626 Grey 626
NGP YAL LCN TRI NGP NGP TRI TRI TRI
Hardware Set #029 – Restroom Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 3 Each 1 Each
Hinge Privacy Set Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 AU5425LN 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 1229A 1270WV
Hardware Set #030 – Privacy Single 3’0” x 7’0” x 1 ¾” HM x HM Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each 1 Set 1 Each 3 Each 1 Each
08 71 00 Page 34
Hinge Privacy Set Door Closer Kickplate Door Sweep Gasket Coat Hook Silencer Wall Stop
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 AU5425LN 4040 Cush K0050 10” x 34” B4E 601A 36” 5050B 3684 3071-1 1229A 1270WV
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #031 – Mezzanine Pair 6’0” x 3’6” x 1 ¾” HM x HM – In-Swing Each opening to have: 2 Each 2 Each 2 Each 1 Each 1 Each
Hinge Floor Bolts Floor Stop/Holder Safety Chain Safety Sign
Continuous Gear Hinge HD2400 #3922 #1224-5 with Hook & Eye OSHA approved 7’0” by Owner
628 626 626 Galv.
NGP TRI TRI
626 626
DOR YAL
626 626 626
DOR YAL YAL
605
YAL
Hardware Set #032 – Canine Cage Doors – 6 required Each opening to have: 1 Each 2 Each
Locking Latch Mortise Cylinder
M9083 x no trim K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit
All Other Hardware Complete by Door Manufacture/Supplier. Hardware Set #032.1 – Armory Cage Door Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each 1 Each
Locking Latch Mortise Cylinder TT Cylinder
M9083 x no trim K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit (outside) S2053 x Thumb Turn
All Other Hardware Complete by Door Manufacture/Supplier. Hardware Set #033 – Miscellaneous Overhead Doors Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each
Card Reader Power Supply
by Owner by Owner/Security Contractor.
All Other Hardware Complete by Door Manufacturer/Supplier. Hardware Set #034 – Kitchen Walk-in Each opening to have: 1 Each
Padlock
PD2512-1/2 x A600 SFIC-UC
All Other Hardware Complete by Door Manufacturer/Supplier.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
08 71 00 Page 35
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #035 – Counter Shutter Each opening to have: 1 Each 1 Each
Mortise Cylinder TT Cylinder
K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit (outside) S2053 x Thumb Turn
626 626
YAL YAL
Cylinders as required by Manufacturer All Other Hardware Complete by Door Manufacturer/Supplier. Hardware Set #036 – Sliding Barn Door Single 8’0” x 8’0” x 1 ¾” Wood Each opening to have: 1 Set
Barn Door Track
1 Each 1 Each
Lock/Floor Bolt Mortise Cylinder
1877 x mounted 40” Above Finish Floor K620 x LFIC 6 pin SA Keyway “0” Bit x AR Cam Key on Break Room side Dust Proof Strike 3910 x mounted at Open and Close positions Door Pull 1191-2 x Thru Bolt Pull Back Plate BP2 x mounted both sides of door
2 Each 1 Each 4 Each 3.9
CFT-202 Complete Kit for One Door 1-CFT-200 Flat Bar Track x 16’0” 15-CFT-222-WB Wall Mount Brackets 4-CFT-202 Strap Mount Hangers 2-CFT-220 Shock Absorbing Stops 1-C-914 Door Bottom Guide Channel x 8’ 1-C-913 Floor Guide with screws
KNC
628 626
ADR YAL
626 630 630
TRI TRI TRI
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A.
08 71 00 Page 36
The hardware schedule below indicates the door opening mark and the associated hardware set. See drawings for opening locations.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Issued 02/07/18
Opening AA.100a AA.100b AA.100c AA.100d AA.100e AA.101a AA.101b AA.102 AA.120a AA.120b AA.121 AA.122 AA.123 AA.210 AA.230a AA.240 AA.310 AA.330 AA.340a AA.340b AA.360 AA.380 AA.390 AE.100 AE.110 AE.120a AE.120b AE.121a AE.121b AE.121c AE.130 AG.026a AG.027a AG.027b AG.050b AG.050c AG.100 AG.101 AG.110
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Hardware Set #019 #019 #019 #019 #024.1 #036 Case Open #024 #036 #025 #020 #034 #034 #027 #027 #027 #027 #027 #003 #027 #020 #017 #020 #027 #025 #025 #005.1 #025 #005.1 #033 #024 #004 #004 #004.1 #017 #027 #027 #021 #027
Opening AG.111 AG.120a AG.120b AG.140 AG.150 AG.160a AG.160b AG.170 AG.170a AG.170b AG.171 AG.172 AM.100 AM.101 AM.110 AM.112 AM.130a AM.130aa AM.130b AM.130bb AM.130c AM.130cc AM.131a AM.131b AM.131bb AM.131d AM.140a AM.140aa AM.140b AM.140bb AM.141 AM.150 AM.160 AM.180a AM.180b AM.180c AM.190 AM.200 AO.100a
Hardware Set #021 #026 #027 #028 #028 #027 #027 #013 #025.3 #013 #006.1 #006 #027 #021 #027 #024 #033 #033 #033 #033 #033 #033 #005.1 #033 #033 #005.1 #033 #033 #033 #033 #033 #033 #024 #020 #033 #008 #009 #005.1 #026
ADDENDUM NO. 2
Opening AO.100b AO.110 AO.120 AO.130 AP.100 AP.110a AP.110b AP.120a AP.120b AP.120c AP.120d AP.121b AP.122a AP.122b AP.122c AP.123a AP.123b AP.123c AP.123d AP.123e AP.123f AP.123g AP.123h AP.130 AP.150a AP.150b AS.100b AS.100c AS.110a AS.120 AS100a AS110b AU.100a AU.100b AU.100c AU.110 AU.120a
Hardware Set #026 #027 #027 #020 #026 #027 #027 #027 #005.1 #033 #033 #007 #033 #033 #005.1 #005.1 #005.1 #022 #021 #033 #033 #033 #033 #027 #024 #009 #005.1 #033 #033 #010 #021 #007 #005.1 #005.1 #033 #020 #011
AU.121
#012
08 71 00 Page 37
02/07/18
Opening AU.121a AU.130 AU.200 AU.200a Cage Lox EB.300a EB.300b EB.300c ES.901 ES.902 OC.100 OC.101 OC.110a OC.110b OC.115 OC.116 OC.120 OC.120a OC.121 OC.130 OC.131 OO.050 OO.060 OO.070 OO.100 OO.110a OO.110b OO.111a OO.111b OO.112 OO.120 OO.121 OO.130 OO.131 OO.142 OU.120a OU.120b PA.103 PA.113
08 71 00 Page 38
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Hardware Set #012 #017 #018 #031 #032 #033 #005.1 #027 #007 #007 #026 #021 #027 #017 #027 #021 #017 #017 #017 #026 #021 #014 #029 #029 #026 #017 #027 #021 #021 #017 #027 #027 #017 #021 #014 #024 #016 #027 #027
Opening PG.100 PG.101 PG.110a
Hardware Set #027 #021 #027
PG.110b
#027
PG.111 PG.111 PG.120 PG.152 PO,101 PO.100 PO.110a PO.110b PO.111a PO.111b PO.120a PO.120b PO.120c PO.120d PO.120e PO.130 PO.131 PO.132 PO.133 PO.134 PO.135 PO.140
#017 #017 #027 #014 #022 #026 #026 #026 #027 #022 #026 #026 #026 #026 #026 #026 #021 #026 #026 #026 #026 #014
PO.150 PO.160c PS.100 PS.100a PS.110 PS.120 PS.120a PS.120b PU.100 WC.100b
#027 #006 #017 #032.1 #021 #017 #032.1 #032.1 #021 #027
END OF SCHEDULE ADDENDUM NO. 2
Opening WD.100a WD.100b
Hardware Set #027 #027
WD.111 WD.112 WD.113a WD.113b WD.120b WE.120a WG.100a WG.100c WH.130 WH.140 WH.200 WN.100 WN.100a WN.100b WO.100 WO.110 WO.120 WO.140a WO.140b
#030 #030 #001 #014.1 #033 #033 #027 #035 #021 #023 #031 #025.2 #033 #033 #026 #026 #027 #002 #015
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section. SUMMARY
A.
Provide gypsum board assemblies complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum board assemblies.
2.
Division 9 Section “Tile” for cementitious backer boards.
3.
Division 9 Section “Acoustical Insulation and Sealants”.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.”
2.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 1
02/07/18 B.
1.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
2.
3.
2.2
Steel Framing and Furring a.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
b.
Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor.
c.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
d.
MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
e.
National Gypsum Company.
Gypsum Board and Related Products a.
American Gypsum Co.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
c.
National Gypsum Company.
d.
United States Gypsum Co.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Georgia Pacific Densglass or equivalent, approved by installer and manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish system.
STEEL PARTITIONS A.
09 29 00 Page 2
Components, General 1.
Comply with specified requirements.
2.
Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0329 Inch.
2.
Depth: As indicated.
C.
Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1.
E.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1.
F.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
2.
Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
G.
Sound Proofing Clips: Resilient sound proofing clips designed for use with steel framing.
H.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1.
Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
2.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
3.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
I.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
J.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 3
02/07/18 2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1.
2.
3.
2.4 09 29 00 Page 4
Regular Type a.
Thickness: 5/8 Inch (15.9 mm).
b.
Long Edges: Tapered.
c.
Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type X a.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
b.
Long Edges: Tapered.
c.
Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Moisture-Resistant a.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9)
b.
Long Edges: Tapered
c.
Location: Walls in areas subject to moisture that are not indicated to receive tile backer board.
4.
Abuse-Resistant and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum abuse-resistant drywall panel enhanced with glass fibers and a high-density gypsum core; surfaced on the front, back and long edges with reinforced mold and mildewresistant, heavy facing paper; and complying with ASTM C 1396 Section 5 and ASTM C 36, Type X.
5.
Impact-Resistant and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum impact-resistant drywall panel enhanced with glass fibers and a high-density gypsum core; surfaced on the front, back and long edges with reinforced mold and mildewresistant, heavy facing paper; and complying with ASTM C 1396 Section 5 and ASTM C 36, Type X. a.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)
b.
Width: 48 inches (1219 mm)
TRIM ACCESSORIES ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 A.
2.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2.
Shapes a.
Corner Bead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
c.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated.
d.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use where indicated.
e.
Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
f.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges.
g.
Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape
C.
1.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 5
02/07/18 2.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1.
D.
09 29 00 Page 6
Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a.
Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.
b.
Use proprietary deflection track where indicated.
c.
Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITIONS
A.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall.
B.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1.
Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2.
For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a.
3. D.
Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
Where sound isolation is required install resilient sound isolation clips spaced minimum 48 o.c.
Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1.
Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
G.
3.4
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.
Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
H.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
I.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
09 29 00 Page 8
1.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduit.
3.
Where partitions intersect open structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
J.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
K.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.
Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 9
02/07/18
3.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02
CONTROL JOINTS
Location Where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the base building structure.
Control Joint* Provide control joint
Where wall or partition runs in uninterrupted straight plane At door jamb, except where door jambs extends from floor to ceiling Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief
Provide joints at minimum 30' intervals Extend joint from door to ceiling
Install control joint so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft and total area between control joints does not exceed 2500 sq ft. Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire- Provided blocking behind the control joint by using a rated system backing material such as 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) Type X gypsum board, mineral fiber, or equivalent meeting the approval of a nationally recognized testing agency. Control joints shall also be installed where specified by the architect or designer as a design accent or architectural feature. *Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 3.6
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A.
Single-Layer Application 1.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.
b.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C.
Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
09 29 00 Page 10
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.7
MSCAA 14-1386-02 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect/Engineer for visual effect.
3.8
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1.
Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Level 5 Finish: Provide level 5 skim coat finish at walls indicated to serve as projection screens and at walls where Level 4 finish does not result in a smooth, level finish free of indentations, and evidence of tape, or fasteners. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 29 00 Page 11
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
09 29 00 Page 12
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 09 51 50 WOOD PANEL CEILING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY A. Provide wood panel ceilings as indicated on drawings as specified, including accessories required for complete and proper installation. 1. Acoustical ceilings panels 2. Suspension system 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings B. Related Sections 1. Division 9: Suspension System Framing and Furring for Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies. 2. Division 23: Mechanical, for work to be coordinated with ceiling. 3. Division 26: Electrical, for additional or larger size wires, as required to properly support lighting fixtures, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Work installer.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A 366 “Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality” B. ASTM A 641 “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire” C. ASTM A 653 “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process” D. ASTM C 635 “Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings” E. ASTM C 636 “Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical and Lay-in Panels” F. ASTM C 423 “Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method” G. ASTM E 1111 “Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceiling Systems” (for open plan products) H. ASTM E 84 “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature and installation instructions
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 51 50 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
C. Samples: Minimum 8" x 8" samples of specified acoustical panel; 8” long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system. D. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of ceiling panels and each accessory. B. Maintenance Data, for inclusion in Maintenance Manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: To ensure proper interface and color match, all acoustical panel units and grid components shall be produced or supplied by a single manufacturer.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened packages; suitably store to protect against exposure to moisture, sunlight, surface contamination, and other unacceptable conditions. C. Handle components to prevent panel edge damage or any other damage to components.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements at Installation: 1. The building shall be enclosed, the air conditioning system shall be operating with proper filters in place and the proper temperature and humidity conditions shall be stabilized before, during and following installation until Substantial Completion. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. 2. Coordination: Coordinate acoustical ceilings work with installers of related work including, but not necessarily limited to, building insulation, gypsum drywall, mechanical systems and electrical systems. B. Dimensional Stability: 1. Panels: Installation of the products shall be carried out where the temperature is between 50ºF and 86ºF, and relative humidity levels maintained between of 25% RH and 70% RH. These temperature and humidity conditions must be met throughout the lifetime of the warranty. It is necessary for the area to be enclosed and for the HVAC systems to be functioning and in continuous operation
1.9
WARRANTY A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. B. Acoustical Panels: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replacement of acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: C. Panels: Sagging, warping and manufacturer’s defects D. Suspension System: Rusting and manufacturer’s defects
09 51 50 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
E. Warranty period for Panels is one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. F. Warranty period for suspension system is ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. G. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. Set out in full.
1.10
MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver and furnish extra material to owner, as described below, to match products installed. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with appropriate labels. 1. Panels: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 5% of the amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each suspension component equal to 2% of the amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design: Proprietary products of Armstrong World Industries, Inc. are specified for quality and appearance standards. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, and approval of Architect, products of other manufacturers may be considered.
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Suspension System for Ceiling Panels: Armstrong WoodWorks Hook-on Suspension System. B. Components: H-bar sections shall be commercial-quality extruded aluminum. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed. H-bars shall be suspended from BPM300.100 U-profile carrying channel. 1. BPM311.156 Hanger for H-profile with BPM300.120 plug-in clip provided for attachment to Uprofile carrying channel. 2. BPM311.017 Connector for H-profile used to form continuous Hook-on H-bar members. 3. BPN300.119 Connector for U-profile used to form continuous U-profile carrying channel. C. Finish: All steel parts shall be chemically cleansed hot dipped galvanized steel. 1. Wall Molding Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of standard colors. D. Hanger Wire: Hanger wire shall be galvanized carbon steel per ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, with a yield stress load of at least three (3) times design load, but not less than 12 gauge (0.106”) diameter.
2.3
WOOD CEILING PANELS A. Wood Ceiling Panels: Code WCP-1, Patina. B. Type: Armstrong WoodWorks Ceiling Panels C. Performance Characteristics 1. Sound Control:
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 51 50 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient: Not Required 2. Flame Spread a. Flame Spread: 25, per ASTM E 84 b. Smoke Developed: 50 per ASTM E 84 D. Surface Texture, Substrate, Size and Edges: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth Non-Perforated Panel. 2. Perforation Pattern: None 3. Surface Finish: a. Grade: A. b. Veneer Species: Bamboo. c. Cut: Manufacturer’s Standard. d. Color – WP-1: Patina (BAP). 4. Substrate: 11/16” thick, Duraflake FR, Class A rated fire-retardant particleboard. 5. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Edge Detail: Square cut edge for installation on Armstrong WoodWorks Hook-on suspension system. Panel edges finished to match panel surface. Factory mitered nominal 6” wood upturns. 7. Outer Perimeter Detail: 6” High Extruded Aluminum Trim Factory Covered with Matching Veneer. 8. Inner Perimeter Trim (At Light Trough): Factory Mitered 6” Nominal Wood Upturns. 9. Accessories. a. Extruded aluminum support hooks. b. DFS t-bar suspension grid (for back-bracing). c. Wood spline to match panels.
2.4
LIMITATIONS A. For WoodWorks Panels surface burning verification, Armstrong used the Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association Laboratory and Testing Service, Test Method ASTM E 84, (i.e., UL723, NFPA 255). This product has a Class A rating based on this test. B. Based on (NFPA 259) test data, WoodWorks Panels are not acceptable for use in air handling plenums under NFPA 90A (Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems) and therefore should not be installed in areas where that standard applies. These materials do not meet the limited combustible requirements for ceilings used in the construction of air-handling plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION A. Examine construction and conditions under which system will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
09 51 50 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. B. General: Install acoustical panels and suspension systems in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and current recommendations, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and the governing code of jurisdiction. C. Application Consideration: Cutouts and apertures available. They are intended for use with audio speakers, air diffusers, sprinklers and certain light fixtures. Not intended for use with smoke detectors. D. Installed panels should be free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. E. Extruded aluminum support hooks to screw attached in the field per manufacturers recommendations. F. DFS t-bar components to be screw attached to back of panel per manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Deflection of any grid components shall not exceed 1/360 of the span.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members, pursuant to manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully restored. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 51 50 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
09 51 50 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 09 70 50 TROWEL APPLIED FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A Provide trowel-applied flooring (T.A.F) complete, including accessories required for complete and proper installation. B Where spaces are scheduled to have T.A.F. flooring, cover floor of closets and alcoves opening off these spaces with same material. Where base is scheduled, provide around entire perimeter of space, including fixed casework, freestanding columns, pilasters and other projections. Covering is not required under permanently build-in casework and equipment.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. B Submit manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and maintenance. C Submit a sample of two-year guarantee provided by the Installer and General Contractor.
1.3
DELIVERY OF MATERIAL A. Deliver materials in unbroken packages, manufacturer's original labels thereon. Do not open packages or remove labels until Architect inspects and approves.
1.4
1.5
TEMPERATURES OF STORAGE AND WORK SPACES A
Installation areas shall be maintained at a temperature not lower than 70 degrees F. for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
B
Install T.A.F. when the temperature in the installation area can be maintained at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F. at any time thereafter. GUARANTEE
A. The General Contractor and the T.A.F. Installer shall jointly guarantee that trowel applied flooring shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years after final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TROWEL APPLIED FLOORING ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 70 50 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A. Basis-of-Design: Troweled, jointless, water-phase resin flooring system. Minimum 1/4" thick. Color as selected by Architect. 1. TAF-1 - "Dex-O-Tex, Cheminert K as manufactured Crossfield Products Corp., or approved
equal (908) -245-2800. 2. Equivalent products of Stonhard are acceptable. Subject to compliance with specifications,
equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered. 2.2
GROUT FILLER COAT A. Filler coat matched to the trowel applied flooring. D-C grout as manufactured by Crossfield Products Corp.
2.3
DRESSING COAT A. Final dressing matched to the trowel applied flooring and filler coat. D-C dressing as manufactured by Crossfeld Products Corp.
2.4
UNDERLAYMENT
A. A-81 underlayment as recommended by Crossfield Products Corp. 2.5
WATER PROOF MEMBRANE A. Dex-O-Tex Waterproof Membrane: Elastomeric, fabric reinforced waterproof membrane system made by flooring manufacturer.
2.6
EDGE TERMINATION A.
Solid aluminum or brass, terrazzo type, in a profile to create flush termination with T.A.F and adjacent floor material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES A. Prior to installing any materials inspect all surfaces to receive flooring. If conditions exist that will prevent proper installation of trowel-applied flooring installation, notify the Architect and the General Contractor, in writing. Starting installation on any part of the surface shall imply acceptance of all surfaces.
09 70 50 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PREPARATION A. Prepare concrete surface as required for proper application by scraping, acid etching, power scarification, or other methods recommended by the TAF manufacturer for the conditions which exist. The installer will be held responsible for the proper bond of the flooring to substrate. The Installer shall use whatever means are necessary to ensure that the TAF is securely bonded to the floor.
3.3
UNDERLAYMENT A. Apply underlayment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Filling surface irregularities and providing slopes as indicated on drawings and as required to provide proper slope to drains and transitions to other flooring.
3.4
APPLICATION A. Perform all tasks in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Apply waterproofing membrane. Apply Bond Coat by trowel or brush. Trowel apply 1/4" body coat. Form cove base where scheduled or detailed. Apply two grout coats to fill in and smooth off body coat. Power sand to remove trowel marks. Roller apply two coats of saturating final finish dressing in texture selected by Architect.
3.5
ADJACENT FLOORING A. Where Trowel Applied Flooring abuts adjacent flooring, handle as follows: 1. Concrete or other flush material: Taper finish surface at minimum slope of 1/8" in four feet to within 1/8” of adjacent flooring level and provide terrazzo type edge strip as directed by Architect. 2. VCT or Ceramic tile: Taper finish surface at minimum slope of 1/8" in four feet to level of adjacent flooring and provide terrazzo type edge strip as directed by Architect. 3. Carpet or other "thick" flooring: Carry flooring under adjacent material or provide terrazzo type edge strip as directed by Architect.
3.6
FINISHING A. After floor covering and base have set sufficiently, wash with neutral cleaner. Leave surfaces smooth, clean and free from defects. Protect floors until final acceptance. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
09 70 50 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
09 70 50 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 10 50 10 STANDARD STEEL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to work of this section. SUMMARY
A. 1.3
Provide all welded steel lockers, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the work. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 3 concrete bases.
B.
Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood ground and furring for anchoring lockers.
1.4
REFERENCES A.
ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B.
ASTM A 1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating construction, materials, dimensions, door frames, doors, handles, locks, ventilation, options, accessories, locker benches, finish, locker layout, anchoring, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color samples.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 50 10 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURER A.
Basis-of-Design: Lyon Workspace Products, PO Box 671, Aurora, Illinois 60507. Toll Free (800) 323-0082. Phone (630) 892-8941. Fax (800) 367-6681. Web Site www.lyonworkspace.com. EMail
[email protected]. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable. 1. Penco Products 2. Republic Storage Products, LLC 3. Global Industries
2.2
STEEL LOCKERS A.
Model: Standard Quiet Lockers.
B.
Style: Single and double tier lockers, as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Locker Size: 1.
Single Tier Lockers: 18 inches wide, 24 inches deep, by 60 inches high.
2.
Double Tier Lockers: 18 inches wide, 24 inches deep, by 30.
D.
Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
E.
Construction: Fully assembled.
F.
Material:
G.
H.
1.
Steel: ASTM A 1008, Class I, mild-annealed, cold-rolled steel, free from surface imperfections, ASTM A 653, galvannealed steel.
2.
Bolts: Zinc plated or other comparable rust-retardant treatment.
Body: 1.
24-gauge steel.
2.
Flanged to give double thickness of metal at back vertical corners.
Door Frame: 1.
10 50 10 Page 2
16-gauge formed-steel channels. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
I.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
Vertical Members: Additional flange to form continuous door strike.
3.
Corners: Lapped and welded into rigid assembly.
4.
Bottom Cross Members: Tang at each end that fits through slot in rear flange of upright frame member to prevent twisting out of alignment.
5.
Top and Bottom Cross Members: Provide support for front edge of locker top and bottom.
Doors: 1.
1-piece,14-gauge steel.
2.
Single, Double, and Triple-Tier Locker Doors: Both vertical edges formed into channelshaped formation. Top and bottom flanged at 90-degree angle.
J.
Ventilation: Single-Tier Lockers: Six 3-1/2-inch louvers top and bottom.
K.
Hinges:
L.
1.
Height: Minimum of 2 inches.
2.
Type: 0.050-inch thick steel, 5-knuckle, full-loop hinge forming double thickness on each leaf.
3.
Attachment: Set hinges in slot in door and frame and projection welded to frame and securely attached to door.
4.
Hinge Pin: Spun over at ends to resist removal.
5.
Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher: 3 hinges.
6.
All Other Tiers: 2 hinges.
7.
Mounting: Right-hand side of door.
Multi-Point Locking Device: 1.
Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher, Locking Device: Engage frame at 3 points.
2.
Double and Triple-Tier Locking Device: Engage frame at 2 points.
3.
Channel-Shaped Locking Device: a.
Full-length reinforcing ribs.
b.
Quiet design using nylon-guide inserts to reduce metal-to-metal contact.
4.
Lock Bar: Enclosed on 3 sides and operate within channel formation of door.
5.
Locking Device: Prelocking so mechanism can be locked in open position. Door locking automatically when closed. ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 50 10 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 6.
7. M.
2.
O.
Safety Reverse Nose for Each Jamb: Eliminate hazard of sharp-pointed edges protruding into locker.
b.
Easily replaceable soft rubber bumper for each jamb.
Single-point latch.
Tamper-Guard Handles: a.
Single, double, and triple-tier lockers.
b.
Chrome-plated, die-cast zinc alloy, with minimum tensile strength of 40,000 psi.
c.
No moving parts shall operate against outside surface of locker.
d.
Padlock Attachment: Integral part of lift, attached directly to locking bar and protected by fixed-handle housing.
e.
Built-in padlock strike.
Single-Point Latching System: a.
Single
b.
4-1/8 inches wide by 6-1/16 inches high by 1-1/4 inches deep.
c.
Flush-front appearance.
d.
Operates with no moving parts.
e.
Pan reinforcements, 18 gauge.
Shelves: 1.
Single-tier lockers.
2.
1 shelf, approximately 9 inches below top.
3.
Single sheet, 24-gauge steel.
4.
Flanged on 4 sides.
5.
Safety Front Flange: Double flanged with second bend turned 45 degrees.
6.
Attachment: Minimum of 2 points through each side flange.
Coat Hooks: 1.
10 50 10 Page 4
a.
Handles: 1.
N.
Door Jambs: Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher: 3 door jambs.
Single lockers. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
1 double-prong ceiling hook and 3 single-prong wall hooks.
3.
Steel rod stock with ball points for snag-free use.
4.
Attachment: Minimum 2 bolts.
5.
Finish: Zinc-plated or comparable rust-retardant treatment.
ACCESSORIES A.
B.
Extra Shelves: 1.
Single sheet, 24-gauge steel.
2.
Flanged on 4 sides.
3.
Safety Front Flange: Double flanged with second bend turned 45 degrees.
4.
Attachment: Minimum of 2 points through each side flange.
Number Plates: 1.
Aluminum.
2.
Size: 2-3/4 inches wide by 1 inch high.
3.
Numbers: Clearly etched numbers a minimum of 3/8 inch high.
4.
Attachment: Attach in prepunched holes near top of doors.
C.
Locks: Combination padlock.
D.
Tops: Individual-sloping tops.
E.
Bottoms: Painted steel. Same color as interior walls.
F.
Closures and Fillers:
G.
2.4
1.
Top closures, closure strips, front expansion fillers, and corner fillers.
2.
Fill spaces between 2 lockers or between lockers and walls as required for proper fit.
End Panels: 1.
End Cover Panels: 14-gauge steel, construction bolt heads exposed at perimeter.
2.
End Finishing Panels: 16-gauge steel, no bolt heads exposed.
LOCKER BENCHES A.
Laminated Hardwood Benches: Laminated hardwood with clear coat finish. 1.
Size: 24” D x 48”W x 1-1/4 inches thick by _______ feet long. ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 50 10 Page 5
02/07/18
2.5
MSCAA 14-1386-02 2.
Finish: Acrylic, 2 coats.
3.
Support Angles: Black steel brackets of size required to securely support locker bench.
FINISH A.
General: Factory apply finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Standard Finish: Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given bonding and rustinhibitive phosphate treatment, and electrostatically sprayed with powder coat. Baked-on finish.
C.
Antimicrobial Finish: Apply antimicrobial finish.
D.
Color: 1.
Exterior Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.
Interior Color: Dove Gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine areas to receive lockers. Notify Architect if areas are not acceptable. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION
A.
Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Install lockers plumb, level, square, rigid, with flush installation.
C.
Use manufacturer's supplied hardware.
D.
Anchoring: Securely Anchor lockers to base and walls as indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Sloping Hoods and Metal Fillers: Install sloping hoods and metal fillers using concealed fasteners.
F.
Joints: Provide flush hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.
G.
Number Plates: Attach number plates to face of doors level with 2 aluminum rivets. Attach in sequence as indicated on the Drawings.
H.
Locker Benches: Install locker benches securely anchored to base on which lockers are mounted.
I.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.
J.
Remove and replace defective or damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.
10 50 10 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 ADJUSTING
A. 3.4
Adjust doors, locks, and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth operation without binding. CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.
3.5
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed lockers from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 50 10 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
10 50 10 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 10 56 13 WIRE RACK SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Provide wide span wire rack fixed shelving units including fabrication and installation.
B.
Related Work, Not Furnished: 1. Structural floor system capable of supporting loads required by prevailing building codes, including loads of storage units to be installed. Provide a maximum allowable sub floor deflection of L/480 under specified storage loads.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Seismic Performance: Provide fixed shelving capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions as determined by local building codes.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is the manufacturer’s authorized and certified representative. 1. Minimum Qualifications: 1-year experience installing systems of similar size and complexity to specified project requirements 2. Manufacturer Certification: Required by manufacturer on manufacturer’s letterhead required at time of bid. Certifications by sales representatives, dealers, or distributors are unacceptable. Qualification must include resume of certified installation supervisor. 3. Provide support within 24 hours for service call.
C.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor, installer and manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, no limitations of other rights the owner may have against the contractor under contract documents. 1. Lifetime Limited Warranty: The entire shelving installation will be warranted against defects in materials for the life of the installation from the date of acceptance by the Owner.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, schematics, testing data, and other items as described in this specification. Include installed weight, load criteria, furnished specialties, and accessories. ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 56 13 Page 1
02/07/18
1.5
B.
Shop Drawings: Prepared and detailing fabrication, assembly, and installation of storage shelving, as well as procedures and diagrams. Include details of layout and installation, as well as clearances, spacing, relation to adjacent construction in plan, elevation, and section, components, assemblies, connections, attachments, reinforcements, and anchorage. Furnish floor layouts, technical, and installation manuals for every unit shipment.
C.
Color Samples: Provide sample for each exposed product and for each color required. Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual product samples, showing full range of colors and textures available.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Manufacturer Certifications: Provide written certification by manufacturer on manufacturer’s letterhead at time of bid required stating compliance with all specifications of shelving systems. Shelving certifications must confirm compliance with all shelf sizes and gauges as noted in these specifications.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Field Measurements: Verify shelving unit location by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating shelving units without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
B.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage and handling requirements.
C.
Sequence and Scheduling: Sequence storage shelving system installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
D.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures related to installation of fixed storage units including, but not limited to, the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Products of Interlake-MeCalux, Inc.; Tennesco, Montel, Inc. Equivalent products of other manufacturers are acceptable, subject to compliance with specified requirements.
MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS – WIRE RACK SHELVING A.
10 56 13 Page 2
Size of Wire Rack Shelving units: 4’ deep, 8’ wide 12’ high. Components in Paragraphs 2.2.B through K may vary slightly in size and configuration, depending upon the wire rack ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 shelving manufacturer. 1.
Shelf Racks: Provide manufacturer’s standard steel wire shelves.
B.
Upright frame: A semi-industrial upright frame shall be made of three or more* cross members to join the top, bottom and center of the posts and form a rectangular upright frame; two or more* braces are added to enhance rigidity; and two foot plates for stability. All parts shall be welded together.
C.
Posts: The post is made of 16-gauge 2'' (51mm) x 1 5/16'' (33mm) C shaped cold rolled steel. On the wider side, the post is slotted at every 2'' (51mm) increment. The slots are trapeze shaped 1'' (25.4mm) long by 3/8'' (9.5mm) wide in their shorter edge, and are designed to accommodate the shelf beam. Slotted posts shall be designed to accommodate standard four-post accessories.
D.
Cross members: Cross members shall be the horizontal link between two posts. The upper cross member shall be flush to the top of the post, the lower one be 6 3/4'' (171.5mm) from the ground and the middle one is 45 7/8'' (1165mm) from the ground. A cross member shall be 1'' (25.4mm) by 1 3/32'' (28mm) U shaped channel made of 16gauge steel. It shall have four oblong perforations on each side to fix end panels, mobile carriage or to connect units one above the other.
E.
Brace: A brace shall be a 1'' (25.4mm) by 1 3/32'' (28mm) U shaped channel made of 16gauge steel. Braces are placed in diagonal, between two cross members to reinforce the upright frame.
F.
Foot plate: The L shaped foot plate shall be made of 12-gauge steel. The overall dimensions shall be 2.75'' (69mm) long, by 1'' (25mm) high by 2'' (51mm) wide.
G.
Reinforcement: If needed, reinforcements can be added to reach extra height or meet special requirements. Reinforcements products already exist for the foot plate and posts. Usually it consists of an extra part welded. More details shall be furnish on demand.]
H.
Top 500 lb shelf beam: The shelf beams are longitudinal supports made to store large or heavy items directly on them for a total up to 500lb. They shall be made with a 14-gauge steel 6 faces tube, made of 2 pieces welded together. The overall tube dimensions shall be minimum 2'' (51mm) by 1.906'' (48mm) and shall present a recess to support drop panels. A standard formed 12-gauge steel claw with 3 hooks is welded at each end to form a complete support. These J shaped claws shall be 5 1/8'' (130mm) high by 2 5/16'' (59mm) long and are inserted into the slots located at the front of the post. Shelf beam shall be easy to install without welding or tool. In top configuration, the tube is welded at 1/4'' (6.3mm) from the top of the claw.
I.
Bottom 500lb shelf beam: The shelf beams are longitudinal supports made to store large or heavy items directly on them for a total up to 500lb. They shall be made with a 14gauge steel 6 faces tube, made of 2 pieces welded together. The overall tube dimensions shall be minimum 2'' (51mm) by 1.906'' (48mm) and shall present a recess to support drop panels. A standard formed 12-gauge steel claw with 3 hooks is welded at each end to form a complete support. These J shaped claws shall be 5 1/8'' (130mm) high by 2 5/16'' (59mm) long and are inserted into the slots located at the front of the post. Shelf beam shall be easy to install without welding or tool. In bottom configuration, the tube is ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 56 13 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 welded at 2 7/8'' (73mm) from the top of the claw, in order to gain space near the ground.
2.3
J.
Top 1500 lb shelf beam: The shelf beams are longitudinal supports made to store large or heavy items directly on them for a total up to 1500lb. They shall be made with a 14-gauge steel 6 faces tube, made of 2 pieces welded together. The overall tube dimensions shall be minimum 3'' (76mm) by 1.906'' (48mm) and shall present a recess to support drop panels. A standard formed 12-gauge steel claw with 3 hooks is welded at each end to form a complete support. These J shaped claws shall be 5 1/8'' (130mm) high by 2 5/16'' (59mm) long and are inserted into the slots located at the front of the post. Shelf beam shall be easy to install without welding or tool. In top configuration, the tube is welded at 1/4'' (6.3mm) from the top of the claw.
K.
Bottom 1500 lb shelf beam: The shelf beams are longitudinal supports made to store large or heavy items directly on them for a total up to 1500lb. They shall be made with a 14-gauge steel 6 faces tube, made of 2 pieces welded together. The overall tube dimensions shall be minimum 3'' (76mm) by 1.906'' (48mm) and shall present a recess to support drop panels. A standard formed 12-gauge steel claw with 3 hooks is welded at each end to form a complete support. These J shaped claws shall be 5 1/8'' (130mm) high by 2 5/16'' (59mm) long and are inserted into the slots located at the front of the post. Shelf beam shall be easy to install without welding or tool. In bottom configuration, the tube is welded at 1 7/8'' (48mm) from the top of the claw, in order to gain space near the ground.
L.
Locking hook: The shelf beam shall be assembled without use of tools or on-site welding. However, a specially designed locking hook shall be used to mechanically secure the shelf beam in place.
M.
Four-post accessories: Four post components and accessories such as shelves, brackets, trays shall be compatible with the primary shelve components.
FINISH A.
Components shall be painted with an electrostatically applied powder coat finish. All steel parts shall be machined smooth and thoroughly cleaned by a process of spraying with a phosphatizing solution to insure removal of oil, grease or other foreign material which in any way would interfere with the adhesion of the priming coat. Following the cleaning process, all parts shall be coated thoroughly and completely covered with fine powder coat, and baked. The powder coat shall not be off gassing to prevent deterioration of collection and other stored materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine subfloor surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fixed storage units. If conditions exist that would negatively impact the installation, submit a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to the installation of shelving. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
10 56 13 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.2
3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02
INSTALLATION A.
Install components and accessories after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Install shelving units to comply with final layout drawings, in strict compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and structural calculations. Position unit's level and plumb at proper location relative to adjoining units and related work
B.
Field Quality Control: Remove and replace components that are chipped, scratched, or otherwise damaged and which do not match adjoining work. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
C.
Adjust: Adjust components and accessories to provide visually acceptable installation.
D.
Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of installation, clear components and surfaces. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. Protection: Protect system against damage during remainder of construction period. Provide protection as required to ensure shelving units are without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
DEMONSTRATION/CUSTOMER TRAINING A.
Provide complete training to end-user’s staff. Training shall include general safety and operation instructions, and basic preventative maintenance procedures.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 56 13 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
10 56 13 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 10 75 16 FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section. SUMMARY
A.
Provide aluminum flagpoles complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings for flagpole, if any, and if not specified in this Section.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads as determined according to the building code in effect for this Project or NAAMM FP 1001 "Guide Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpole," whichever is more stringent. 1.
1.4
Base flagpole design on maximum standard-size flag suitable for use with pole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For type of flagpoles required. Include installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show general layout, jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units from a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy kraft paper or other weathertight wrapping and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 75 16 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following. manufacturers will be considered. 1.
Baartol Co., Inc.
2.
Concord Industries, Inc.
3.
Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4.
Kearney-National Inc.; American Flagpole Div.
5.
Olympus Flag & Banner; EMC Div.
Equivalent products of other
FLAGPOLES A.
Pole Construction, General: Construct poles and ship to Project site in one piece, if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weathertight, hairline field joints.
B.
Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless, extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241 (ASTM B 241M), alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of .188 inch. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, temper T6.
C.
2.3
1.
Provide cone-tapered aluminum flagpoles.
2.
Height: As indicated on Drawings.
Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) minimum wall thickness, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Provide with 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. FITTINGS
A.
Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated. 1.
10 75 16 Page 2
0.063 (1.6mm) spun aluminum to match flagpole.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
C.
Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless steel swivel snap hooks per halyard.
D.
Collar: Spun aluminum to match flag pole finish.
E.
Flags: Provide American
2.4
FLAG A.
B. 2.5
Flags: Provide three (3) flags: 1.
American Flag
2.
State of Tennessee
3.
Memphis Shelby County Airport Authority
Fabrication: Fabricate flags from 100% long-lasting 2-ply spun polyester with polyester canvas heads for durability and two (2) solid brass grommets to ensure stability. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, and water mixed in proportions to attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi (20 MPa), complying with ASTM C 94.
B.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C \ 1107.
C.
Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.
D.
Elastomeric Sealant: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.6
FINISHES A.
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B.
Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
10 75 16 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I minimum 0.07 mil coating, with clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker), complying with AAMA 607.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Prepare in-ground flagpoles by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B.
Excavation: For foundation, excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.
C.
Secure forms, foundation tube, fiberglass sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, braced to prevent displacement during concreting.
D.
Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moistcure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days or use a nonstaining curing compound.
E.
Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter.
3.2
FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A.
General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Install flag pole plumb.
B.
Foundation-Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch (50-mm) layer of elastomeric sealant and cover with flashing collar.
C.
Clean flagpoles and leave free of dirt and other deleterious substances. END OF SECTION
10 75 16 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 11 14 13 TURNSTILES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.5
Provide turnstile as indicated on drawings, as specified; including all accessories and components required for proper installation and operation.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
1.4
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to this section.
Refer to Division 26 and the Drawings for electrical connections.
REFERENCES A.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
Comply with codes and regulations of authorities have jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
B.
Shop Drawings: Showing turnstile components and turnstile in relation to adjacent construction.
C.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 14 13 Page 1
02/07/2018 1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years’ experience manufacturing similar products.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum two (2) years’ experience installing similar products.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.8
1.9
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.
B.
Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.10 SEQUENCING A.
Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
1.11 WARRANTY A.
Warrant turnstile against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of deliver.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Alvarado Manufacturing Co. (800-423-4143), Hayward Turnstiles, Inc. (203647-9144), Turnstiles, US (303-670-1099) are acceptable. Equivalent products of other manufacturers are acceptable subject to compliance with specified requirements.
FULL HEIGHT TURNSTILE A.
11 14 13 Page 2
Basis-of-Design: Hayward Industries “HT431 SecureTurn” full height turnstile with fullywelded exterior components. Turnstile shall have self-centering mechanism with hydraulic shock suppression, permanently lubricated bearings. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Passage: Clockwise passage.
C.
Finish: Manufacturer’s Powder coat finish, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
D.
Provide safety sleeve heel pack.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Power supply input 100-240VAC (.7 amp) 50/60 hz output 24VDC (1.1 amp). All electrical components shall be UL recognized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Verify that substrate is level, prior to turnstile installation.
C.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, approved submittals and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.
B.
Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.5
Contact factory prior to attempting to repair Turnstiles. If damage occurs during a service attempt by non-certified personnel, warranty is voided.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 14 13 Page 3
02/07/2018
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
11 14 13 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 11 40 00 ICE MACHINES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Provide ice machines and ice storage bins as specified and as indicated on Drawings, including all accessories and components required for proper operation and installation.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Refer to Plumbing Drawings refrigerant lines, drains and other materials required to complete equipment installation.
2.
Refer to Electrical Drawings and specifications for wiring and other electrical materials required to complete equipment installation.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of ice maker submit manufacturer's accessories and requirements for access and maintenance clearances, water and drainage, refrigerant lines, power and service-connections including roughing-in dimensions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication service requirements, and attachments to other work. 1.
Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for power.
2.
Piping Diagrams: Details of piping systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping.
C.
Maintenance Data: Operation, maintenance, and parts data for inclusion in the maintenance manuals, including a product schedule:
D.
Submit copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing ice machine equipment, who has completed installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance. ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 40 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Product Options: Drawings and specifications indicate equipment based on the specific products indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment with equal size and performance characteristics will be considered.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
D.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment or components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
E.
ASHRAE Compliance: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers' ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
F.
NSF Standards: Comply with applicable NSF International (NSF) standards and criteria and provide NSF Certification Mark on each equipment item, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric-powered equipment, and for piping and for plumbing fittings, including vacuum breakers and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver equipment as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B.
Store equipment in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of equipment and installation areas by field measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other related work performed by others.
B.
Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections.
1.8
WARRANTY A.
11 40 00 Page 2
Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for ice machine. This warranty shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 B.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Warranty Periods: 1.
3 Years Parts and Labor on Bin and Accessories
2.
5 Years For Parts and Labor on Evaporator
3.
5 Years For Parts on Compressor
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ICE MAKING AND ICE STORAGE EQUIPMENT A.
B.
C. 2.2
Ice Machines – Vending Areas: Icemaker: Follett Model 7UD100A-NW-CF-ST000 “Energy Star”, undercounter icemaker with 7 lb (3.2 kg) of storage. 1.
Size: Height: 33.50", width: 14.62", 22.12"
2.
Ice Production: Approximately 125 lbs of ice per 24 hours of Chewblet compressed nugget ice at air temperature of 70 F (21 C) and water temperature of 50 F (10 C).
3.
Servicing: Ice machine to be equipped with printed circuit board and diagnostics to allow simplified servicing with capacitive touch user interface.
4.
Storage Area Insulation: Non-CFC, high density foam-in-place polyurethane.
5.
Electrical: 8’ (2.4 m) cord and NEMA 5-15 right angle plug provided 115 V/60/1. Dispenser ETL.
Ice Machines in Expendable Storage: Provide two (2) Manitowoc Model IY-0524A-B320 dice cube ice machines, with Duratech corrosion-resistant finish. 1.
Ice Production: Up to 485 lbs of ice per 24 hours.
2.
Storage Bins: Provide two (2) Manitowoc B-320, 38” high x 22” wide bins with 210 lb storage capacity. Provide bins with 12” stainless steel legs and optional casters.
3.
Electrical 115V
Provide water filter, refrigerant lines, drains and other accessories required for proper installation and operation of ice making and storage equipment. FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Factory assemble equipment to greatest extent possible. ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 40 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of ice making and storage equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Install equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, original design, and referenced standards.
B.
Complete equipment field assembly, where required, using methods indicated on approved shop drawings. 1.
Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.
C.
Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through equipment to make final connections.
E.
Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
3.3
PROTECTING A.
3.4
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner that ensures equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of project Completion. START-UP
A.
11 40 00 Page 4
Startup Services: Perform startup services, demonstrate equipment and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1.
Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize equipment, both inside and out, and relamp equipment with integral lighting. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
2.
Test each item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective in operation, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
3.
Test refrigeration equipment's ability to maintain specified operating temperature. Repair or replace equipment that does not maintain specified operating temperature.
4.
Test water, drain, gas, refrigerant, and water piping for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components.
Training: Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.
Schedule training with Owner. Provide a minimum of at least seven (7) days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 11 40 00
ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 40 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
.
11 40 00 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 11 41 20 WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections apply to work of this section SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Provide walk-in site assembled coolers and freezers, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of work, including accessories needed for proper installation and operation. RELATED WORK
A.
Refer to Division 9 Section “Tiling” for Quarry tile floor.
B.
Refer to Section 23 for HVAC requirements.
C.
Refer to Division 23 for refrigerant piping, pipe insulation and refrigerant.
D.
Section 23 for direct-digital control system for HVAC.
E.
Refer to Division 26, Electrical for lighting and power requirements.
1.4
WARRANTY A.
1.5
Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five (5) years from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. Failure includes but is not limited to inability to maintain set temperature. SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.
Walk-in units, including assembly and installation instructions.
2.
Condensing units, with mounting rack where required.
3.
Unit coolers.
4.
Temperature controls and alarms.
5.
Diagrams and details of piping, wiring and controls.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 41 20 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 6.
1.6
Manufacturers identification signage for freezers, coolers and alarm systems.
B.
Operational test reports.
C.
Final field test reports.
D.
Maintenance and operating manual.
E.
Manufacturer’s compressor warranty.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
C.
1.
420-08 Unit Coolers for Refrigeration.
2.
520-04 Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1.
D.
E.
ASTM International (ASTM): 1.
A240/A240M-14 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and For General Applications
2.
E84-11 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
National Sanitation Foundation/American National Standard (NSF/ANSI): 1.
F.
11 41 20 Page 2
7-09 Commercial Refrigerators and Storage Freezers
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 2.
G.
15-10 Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
70-14 National Electric Code
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1.
207-08(R2014) . Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical
2.
471-10(R2014) . Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
1598-03(R2012)Luminaires
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark certifying compliance with applicable standards.
B.
UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards, and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:
2.2
1.
ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.”
2.
NFPA 70, “National Electric Code.”
WALK-IN COOLER AND FREEZER CONSTRUCTION A.
General: Prefabricated, sectional, all-metal clad, modular units, designed for easy accurate field assembly.
B.
Provide walk-in units manufactured for food service use conforming to NSF/ANSI 7, UL 207, and UL 471 Floorless.
C.
Panel Construction: 1.
General: Interchangeable, 1219 mm (48 inch) maximum width, 101 mm (4 inch) thick, filled with insulation. Double seal serrated neoprene rubber gaskets to assure air and vapor tight joints.
2.
Corner panels: 90 degree angle, radiuses 15 mm (0.5 inch) inside and outside, with 305 mm (12-inch) dimensions each side.
3.
Panel edges: Foam-in-place, tongue-and-grooved urethane to assure tight joints. Provide double seal serrated neoprene rubber gaskets to assure air and vapor tight joints on the interior and exterior of each panel along every tongue.
4.
Insulation: 101 mm (4 inch) minimum foamed-in-place polyurethane with manufacturer’s rated “K” factor of not more than 0.15, free rise design of not less than 27 kg per cubic meter (1.7 pounds per cubic foot), or inplace density of not less than 32 kg per cubic meter (2 pounds per cubic foot). Provide floor screeds with minimum of 63 mm (2-1/2 inches) of foamed insulation. ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 41 20 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 5.
6.
Door Panel and Door: a.
Provide channel thermal breaker type reinforcing steel frame around the entire perimeter of the door opening.
b.
Door to be an infitting flush-mounted type with dual flexible blade wiper gasket on the bottom, and a replaceable magnetic gasket on the top edge and along both sides.
c.
Provide heated, double glass view windows in refrigerator doors.
d.
Door to be equipped with a minimum of three (3) hinges, for rough usage including aluminum diamond plate on inside of door panel and frame to a height of 915 mm (36 inches).
e.
Provide hydraulic exterior door closer to prevent slamming and assure secure closing.
f.
Door hinges and latch and strike assembly: Manufacturer's standard, self-closing cam-lift type hinges, for 1219 mm (48 inch) door, chrome plated or polished aluminum finish, made to provide for locking, but with an inside safety release mechanism to prevent anyone from being locked inside when door is locked from outside.
g.
Concealed, energy use selective, anti-sweat heater wire circuit: Provide sufficient heat to prevent condensation and frost formation at the door jambs and exterior edges of the door on all sides.
h.
Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard, 50 mm (2-inch) minimum diameter, dial type, flush mounted in door panel.
Pressure relief port: Provide for all freezers operating at 18 degree C (0 degree F), or lower, two-way type ports, to allow for an increase or decrease of air pressure on the interior of the freezer to equalize with air pressure on the exterior. Provide ports with automatically controlled, UL approved anti-sweat heaters. Complete device to carry UL Label and be assembled ready for connection. Install port in a wall panel away from the direct air stream flowing from the coils.
D.
Wherever compartment dimension exceed clear-span ability of ceiling panels, provide I-beam support on exterior of ceiling or spline-hangers. Install 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter steel rods through beam/hangers and secure to structure above. Beams or posts within compartments are not acceptable.
E.
Rub rail wall protectors: Manufacturer’s standard, at floor line of walls exposed to traffic.
11 41 20 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 F.
2.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Lights: Provide high-efficiency rated two-tube fluorescent lamps in vapor-proof fixtures with safety shields. Lighting must conform with UL 1598. Provide diffuser and ballast capable of operating in minus 23 degrees C (10 degrees F) temperature. Lights must run full length of walk-in starting 610 mm (24 inches) from front panel and extending within 610 mm (24 inches) of back panel. Run between shelf rows to obtain 323 lux (30 foot-candles) at floor level regardless of any interior furnishings. CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Comply with ARI Standard 520. Air cooled, water cooled or combination air/water cooled type as shown in construction documents.
B.
Provide motor driven integral compressor, motor starter, condenser, receiver, common base, and safety/operational controls.
C.
Receiver capacity not to be less than 125 percent of system refrigerant charge.
D.
For units racked above each other and for units installed in a closet, provide a factory fabricated steel rack extending approximately 1143 mm (45 inches) above the floor.
E.
Provide two (2) condensing units and unit coolers with independent refrigeration systems for freezer when shown on construction documents or recommended by manufacturer due to size or freezer.
F.
Lights: Provide LED lights capable of operating in minus 23 degrees C (10 degrees F) temperature. Lights must run full length of walk-in starting 610 mm (24 inches) from front panel and extending within 610 mm (24 inches) of back panel. Run between shelf rows to obtain 323 lux (30 foot-candles) at floor level regardless of any interior furnishings.
G.
Provide positive oil lubrication and oil level indicating device for each compressor. Provide water regulating valve for water cooled unit.
H.
Compressor Motor: Squirrel cage induction type of ample size for continuous operating at maximum compressor performance. Provide inherent protection, in compressor terminal box, for each phase of motor.
I.
Pressure Switches: Automatic reset low pressure switch, and automatic or manual reset high pressure cutout.
J.
Air Cooled Condensing Units: 1.
High efficiency type piped and automatically controlled to operate at lower head pressures during low ambient temperature conditions. Designed and weather-proofed for outdoor installation, to operate satisfactorily at winter
ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 41 20 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 ambient temperatures down to 6 degrees C (10 degrees F), and be provided with crankcase and receiver heaters. 2.
2.4
The condenser fans are to be driven by permanent split capacitor motors.
UNIT COOLERS A.
Comply with ARI Standard 420. Units to be UL listed, forced-ventilation type. Provide integral defrosting, internal or external refrigerant distributor, single or multiple fans and motors, drip-pan, deflectors, aluminum or baked-enamel steel housing, hangers, and all accessories. Unit coolers for kitchen walk-in units to be NSF approved.
B.
Motors: Permanent split capacitor type in accordance with Section 11 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT. Provide motors with thermal overload protection and manual starting switch.
C.
Drain Pans: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide additional drain pans under uncovered refrigerant connections, and interconnect them with main drain pan. For freezer units provide electrically heated drain pan.
D.
Defrost Provision:
2.5
1.
Refrigerators: Defrost to occur during compressor off cycle with evaporator fan running continuously.
2.
Freezer defrost: Defrost by heating elements incorporated into coil and drain pan. Operation of evaporator fan to be delayed after defrost cycle until evaporator is cold enough to freeze any water droplets that are on evaporator coil. Defrosting unit to be automatically controlled by an electric clock, refrigerant suction gas pressure sensing device, or by means of sensing increased air resistance due to ice accumulation.
MONITORING ALARM SYSTEM A.
11 41 20 Page 6
Provide an electronic monitoring and alarm system for each section of each unit. 1.
System Components: Detecting thermostat, master control panel, interconnecting wiring, remote audible alarm, and defrost compensator. Provide dials showing temperatures and pilot lights, warning lights, switches, transformer, and buzzer, all as a part of the master control panel. Locate master control panel and remote audible alarm as indicated on construction documents. Provide power fuse to protect system components.
2.
System Operation: Set alarms at 5 degrees C (10 degrees F) above and below specified operating temperatures.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B.
Personnel Alarm: For each unit, provide separate audible alarm system operable from inside unit, for use of personnel unable to exit unit. Locate remote audible alarm where indicated on construction documents.
C.
The monitoring alarm system shall interface with the over building monitoring and alarm systems.
2.6
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Identify all walk-ins, refrigeration equipment and alarm devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Assemble walk-in units and install refrigeration equipment as described in the respective manufacturer's instructions. Make panel joints tight and seal all panel penetrations to prevent condensation or frosting. 1.
Unit cooler: NSF approval requires that the unit be suspended at 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) minimum distance below the ceiling to allow cleaning the top of the unit cooler.
2.
Mount pipe, conduit, and instrumentation on the exterior and pass thru neatly drilled penetrations to the lights or other devices.
B.
Piping, Pipe Insulation and Refrigerant: Provide in accordance with Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING.
C.
Install controls in accordance with Installation:
3.2
COOLER AND FREEZER START-UP, AND PERFORMANCE TESTS AND INSTRUCTIONS: A.
Initial Start-up and Operational Test: 1.
Provide all lubricants and accessories before initial start-up. Start and operate all equipment.
2.
Follow the manufacturer’s procedures and place the systems under all modes of operation.
3.
Supplement initial charges of lubricating oil to assure maximum operating capacity.
4.
Adjust all safety and automatic control instruments. Record manufacturer’s recommended readings hourly.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
11 41 20 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 5.
B.
C.
Operational tests must cover a period of not less than three (3) days. Submit operational test report.
Test Reports: Submit the final field test reports for each system tested, describing test apparatus, instrumentation calculations, and equipment data based on industry standard forms. Include in data: 1.
Compressor and air moving device ampere readings.
2.
Power supply characteristics, including phase imbalance, with 1/2 percent accuracy.
3.
Thermostatic expansion valve superheat-value as determined by field test.
4.
Sub-cooling.
5.
High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points.
6.
Monitoring alarm system.
7.
Low oil pressure switch set-point.
8.
Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
9.
Moisture content.
10.
Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.
11.
Capacity control set-points.
12.
Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy consumption.
13.
Where final adjustments and settings cannot be permanently marked or drilled and pinned as an integral part of device, include adjustment and setting data in test report.
Make arrangements with owner for training of maintenance staff. Use the start-up and test period for required operation and maintenance instructions to MSCAA personnel. END OF SECTION 11 41 20
11 41 20 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 12 59 00 COMPUTER CONSOLE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2
SUMMARY A. Provide a computer console system capable of supporting electronics and variable height work surface. Provide all components and accessories required for a complete and operable installation. B. Coordinate electrical and data connections with other trade contractors as required to facilitate proper installation and operation of computer equipment installed by Owner.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly showing the location of all electronics in isometric view in addition to a plan (top) and front views. B. The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a tolerance of not more than +/- 0.062” (1.6mm). C. Information submit assembly instructions and recommendations. D. Submit names and contact information for the product supplier, installer, and the product manufacturer.
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Optional monitor racks integrated with the console shall comply with Electronic Industry Association (E.I.A.) specifications for rack mounting ANSI/E standard RS-310. B. Monitor mounts used with the mounting system shall be compliant with the Mounting Interface Standard established by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA).
1.5
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Deliver to site in knockdown (flat packed) form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURER/MODEL ADDENDUM NO. 2
12 59 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
A. Products of Winsted Corporation is specified. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered. Winsted Corporation contact information. Website: winsted.com/Telephone: 800.447.2257 or 952.944.9050, FAX: 800.421.3839 or 952.944.1546. B. Model: Winsted Model B3250 “Impulse Alcove”. 1. Size: Nominal 46” adjustable height,96.5 wide. 2.2
COMPUTER CONSOLES A. Console and Monitor Mounting System: The console shall be comprised of end frames with dual electric-lift legs. The system will also feature two ergonomically height-adjustable work surfaces with an integrated aluminum “Versa-Trak” monitor mounting system. B. Construction: Provide unit that is pre-engineered modular console construction for a series of independent sectional compartments. C. Work Surfaces: The console shall feature two 1.10” (28mm) thick MDF core, high-pressure laminate finish laminated work surfaces with Safeguard Edge. 1. Color: Wilsonart “Graphite Nebula” D. Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of end frames connected by a sheet metal horizontal modesty panel. Optional external decorative side panels fabricated from laminated MDF core. E. Self-supporting Skeleton Framework: Curved rear horizontal modesty panel constructed of 11 gauge (.119”) formed sheet metal. Modesty panel connecting to and spanning 14 gauge (.074”) end frames to form a complete structure. F. Horizontal Modesty Panel: 16 gauge (.060”) formed sheet metal modesty panel shall incorporate an easy-access cable raceway. G. 14 gauge (.074”) end frames shall be a minimum of 4-1/2” (114mm) in width, capable of integrating two sets of electric-lift legs along with two cable followers. H. End frames shall support a fully loaded console and incorporate 3/8” (10mm) diameter threaded adjustable glides and a duplex power outlet. Quick-release lift-off access panels shall be located on the inside each end frame.
2.2
ELECTRIC LIFT LEG
12 59 00 Page 2
Inner Columns:
Steel
Outer Columns:
Steel
Mounting Plates:
14 Gauge Formed Steel ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Levelers:
1-1/4” Dia. Black Plastic 2” Stem
Adjustment Range:
16”
Standard and Minimum Start Height:
(Knee Clear) 30”
Maximum Recommended Double Column Lift Weight:
520 Lbs.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine area where consoles will be installed. Notify the Architect, in writing, if conditions exist that would negatively impact console installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install consoles in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and in compliance with ADA, local and State building codes as it pertains to accessibility. B. Assembly of the console shall be accomplished without the need for either welding or carpentry work. C. Install framework at the site in advance of external finishing panels. The framework shall be fully capable of supporting all electronics. Installer shall take full responsibility for all components of installation and coordinate electrical and data connections with other trade contractors as required to facilitate proper installation.
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect consoles until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
12 59 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
12 59 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 14 45 00 VEHICLE LIFTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements apply to work of this section.
Heavy Duty Vehicle lifts including safety equipment, controls and accessories as specified, including all components and accessories required for complete installation and proper operation.
COORDINATION A.
Division 23 for coordination with HVAC systems
B.
Division 26 for coordination with electrical systems.
REFERENCES A.
ALI: Automotive Lift Institute.
B.
ANSI/ALI ALCTV: Safety Requirements for the Construction, Testing, and Validation of Automotive Lifts.
C.
International Standards Organization (ISO): ISO 9001 Quality management systems Requirements.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL201 - These requirements cover garage equipment, rated not more than 600 volts, for use in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit equipment foundation requirements, including drawings and concrete psi requirements.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data, including: 1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 45 00 Page 1
02/07/18
1.6
1.7
3.
Installation manual.
4.
Operations manual.
5.
Maintenance manual.
6.
Safety manual.
C.
Shop Drawings: Template drawings and load reactions for lift application.
D.
BIM Models: Manufacturer's Building Information Model for lifts.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Factory trained authorized company, company insured for completed operations of installing lift.
B.
In addition to the other requirements outlined herein, the lift or lifts, shall comply with all applicable requirements of ANSI standards. "Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care and Use of Automotive Lifts " as published by the American National Standards Institute. The lift company Quality Management System shall be ISO9001 certified.
C.
Lift shall be 3rd party certified by ETL testing laboratory and labeled with the ETL/Automotive Lift Institute (ALI) label that affirms the lifts meet conformance to all applicable provisions of American National Standard ANSI/ALI ALCTV and in compliance with IBC chapter 30 section 3001.2.
D.
Lift and all components shall be new. Used or refurbished lift and components not acceptable.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.8
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for failures due to defective materials and workmanship. Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized repairs or labor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
14 45 00 Page 2
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Rotary Lift, which is located at: 2700 Lanier Dr.; Madison, IN 47250; Toll Free Tel: 800-640-5438; Tel: 812-273-1622; Fax: 800-578-5438; Email:
[email protected]; Web:www.rotarylift.com. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 B.
2.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered, subject to compliance with specified requirements and Owner’s acceptance.
80,000 LB PARALLELOGRAM DRIVE ON SURFACE LIFTS A.
Lift Model: VRex 80. 1.
Assembly shall consist of an electro-hydraulic lift unit, a control console and accessories. The control console shall be connected by required lengths of stainless steel hydraulic pipe or steel reinforced hydraulic hose, nylon compressed air line and electrical cable approved for use by the code authority of jurisdiction. a.
2.
3.
Each platform shall be constructed of steel plate supported by steel tubes.
Paint: Provide in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. a.
Marine grade paint zinc primer and epoxy top coats on baseplates. The control panel, lift legs and runways are epoxy coated only.
b.
Marine grade paint for the entire lift and on the control panel.
Hydraulic System: a.
Each hydraulic cylinder shall have a flow check integrally mounted to prevent collapse in the event of a major fluid leak.
b.
The lift shall be driven by a hydraulic pump of U.S. manufacturer, capable of supplying the appropriate psi and gpm to operate the lift.
c.
The lift shall be able to be lowered from any raised position by operation of a manual pump and valve.
4.
Safety Locks: Steel safety locks with a safety factor of not less than 3:1 shall be mounted one set to each lifting cylinder and shall allow the lift to be locked at a minimum of 8 different levels.
5.
Safety Edges: Full-length continuous safety edges mounted to the lower surface of the main lifting platform. Safety tape switch will be located on the outside of both platforms. When any of these safety edges are displaced horizontally or vertically, the lift will stop. Safety edges inside are also optional.
6.
Control console shall house the following equipment: a.
Oil reservoir, suction strainer, low pressure return filter, hydraulic gear pump and manual pump.
b.
Electrical enclosures for control components shall be NEMA 12 rated (minimum) and have the following controls mounted on them while still maintaining their ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 45 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 sealing ability:
7.
c.
Systems disconnect.
d.
"Power-On" pilot lamp.
e.
"Raise" and "Lower" controls and "Press to lock lift" control.
f.
"Operator Lock-Out" pilot lamp.
The control system shall be operated by a Programmable Logic Control (PLC) and lock-out all operations of lift controls if an unsafe condition exists due to insufficient air pressure to operate safety locks; displaced safety edges, locks not disengaged or uneven platform heights. This lock-out shall not be able to be reset unless unsafe condition has been corrected. a.
The control system shall ensure that lifting platforms differ in height by no more than 2 inches (51 mm). If platforms become uneven by a greater amount, the lift shall stop and lock-out operator.
B.
Capacity: 80,000 lb
C.
Number of Legs: 4
D.
Minimum Floor Thickness: 6”
E.
Electronic Programmable Control Panel With Electric Power Unit, UL201 Compliant, 208/230/460 volt 3 phase 60 Hz Over Hydraulic Cylinder Drive: All models bio-fluid compatible.
F.
Rise: 77-3/4 inches, maximum rise bottom of base to runway top.
G.
Rise Time: 90 seconds
H.
Collapsed Height: 16-1/4 inches
I.
Platform Length: 48 feet (14630 mm).
J.
Overall Length: 48 feet (14630 mm).
K.
Overall Width: 109 feet
L.
Width of Runway: 32 inches
M.
Distance Between Runways: 45 inches
N.
Motor: 15/20 hp
O.
Finishes: Red, RAL3002.
P.
Optional Accessories: Stainless steel baseplates.
14 45 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin installation until work in installation areas is completed.
B.
Notify Architect of conditions that may negatively impact the lift installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Install in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.
B.
Test for proper operation and retest and adjust until lift operates properly.
TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL A.
3.4
Coordinate training of Owner’s personnel with Owner’s Representative. Review operations maintenance, and safety procedures for lifts.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed lifts until completion of project before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 45 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
14 45 00 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
SECTION 14 60 00 CRANES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.4
Provide ceiling mounted ten ton bridge cranes, complete, including all components and accessories required for proper installation and operation.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
1.3
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections apply to this section.
Refer to Division 26 - Wiring Methods: Electrical supply, conduit, wiring, and other electrical components for powering lifting device, hoist trolley tractor drive.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural design shall include full rated load capacity plus 15 percent for hoist and trolley weight and 25 percent impact factor for speed of lifting device and weight of tooling.
B.
Crane shall be designed to withstand: 1
Crane and hoist dead load.
2.
Live load capacity equal to net rated hook load.3. Inertia forces from crane and load movement.
REFERENCES A.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Manual of Steel Construction, Part 5, Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI B30.11 - Monorails and Underhung Cranes.
C.
ASTM International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM A36 - Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 60 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
1.5
D.
American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
E.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) - Specification 1910.179 Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
SUBMITTALS A.
B. 1.6
1.7
1.8
ASTM A490 - Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.
Describe capacities, performance, operation, and applied forces to foundation.
2.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.
Installation instructions and recommendations.
Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing configuration, dimensions, service area, and construction and installation details.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in designing and manufacturing cranes with minimum 25 years successful experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company experienced in assembly and installation of cranes with 5 years successful experience and acceptable to crane manufacturer. 1.
Perform welding by certified operators in accordance with AWS D14.1.
2.
Bolted connections shall be in accordance with torque tightening procedures specified in AISC Manual, Part 5.
3.
Clearly label crane with rated load capacity. Place label at height and location easily read from floor level and loading position.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
14 60 00 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 A.
1.9
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: On manufacturer's standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace assemblies and components that fail in materials and workmanship within warranty period from date of Substantial Completion. 1.
5 years or 10,000 hours warranty for manual push-pull work station crane, jib crane, and gantry crane products to cover defects in materials and workmanship.
2.
2 years or 4,000 hours warranty for cranes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the specifications and approval by the Owner products of the companies listed below are acceptable. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered. 1.
Whiting Crane and Railway Services (800)336-7900.
2.
Gorbel,Inc. (800-821-0086.
3.
Konecranes, Inc. 937-525-5533
BRIDGE CRANES A.
B.
Crane shall provide coverage of rectangular area of size indicated on Drawings and consist of: 1.
Support structure requiring only primary structural support without longitudinal or lateral bracing.
2.
Two rigid, parallel runways. Cranes with more than two runways or with articulating runways are not acceptable.
Crane system shall allow for expansion, disassembly and relocation, and accept additional or multiple mixed capacity bridges. 1.
C.
Crane shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in accordance with ANSI B30.11, and OSHA 1910.179.
Productivity ratio: Crane shall be designed to manually move load with maximum force of 1/100 load weight. ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 60 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
D.
Runway and bridge track: Enclosed type limiting dust and dirt collection on rolling surfaces with maximum deflection of 1/450 span based on capacity plus 15 percent for lifting device weight.
E.
Crane operating temperature: 5 to 200 degrees F (-15 to 93 C).
F.
Crane shall be designed to withstand: 1. Structural design shall include full rated load capacity plus 15 percent for hoist and trolley weight and 25 percent impact factor for speed of lifting device and weight of tooling. 2. Crane and hoist dead load. 3. Live load capacity equal to net rated hook load. 4. Inertia forces from crane and load movement.
G.
Ceiling Mounted Bridge Crane: Ceiling mounted, work station, steel construction, bridge crane with overhead hanger assemblies, two runways, bridge moving perpendicular to runways, and equipped with enclosed track, end trucks, hoist trolley, festooning system, bumpers, and other accessories
I.
Construction: Fabricate from ASTM A36 steel sections with finished ends and surfaces.
J.
Hanger assemblies: Provide number and type of hanger assemblies required for suspending runways from overhead steel beam support structure.
K.
Sway bracing: Brace runways as . Provide runways with sway brace fittings for attachment of diagonal pipe bracing to top chord of trussed runway.
Q.
Hoist trolley: Rigid-body trolley designed to ride inside enclosed track of bridge and carry hoist and load. Articulating trolleys are not acceptable.
R.
End stops: Molded composite, resilient bumper installed in runway and bridge tracks to prevent end trucks, hoist trolley, and festoon carriers from rolling out of track. Bolt stops without energy absorbing bumper are not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin installation until support structures have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that accurate crane applied forces and anchor bolt patterns are provided are are compatible with building foundation design.
14 60 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02
INSTALLATION A.
Install units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
B.
Do not modify crane components in any manner without advance written approval by crane manufacturer.
C.
Clearances for moving crane components: 1.
3 inches (76 mm) minimum vertical clearance from any overhead obstruction.
2.
2 inches (51 mm) minimum horizontal clearance from any lateral obstruction.
3.
3.3
3.4
a.
Level to within plus or minus 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6.1 m).
b.
Parallel with opposite runway to within plus or minus (3 mm in 6.1 m).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform field quality control testing as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Inspect installed crane. Verify all bolts are tight and lock washers fully compressed.
D.
Field test crane and accessories for operating functions. Ensure crane movement is smooth and proper. Adjust as required and correct deficiencies.
E.
Clean surfaces. If necessary, touch-up paint damage, scratches, and blemishes with manufacturer provided matching paint.
F.
Protect crane from other construction operations.
DEMONSTRATING AND TRAINING A.
3.5
Prior to applying proper torque to the bolts, ensure runways are:
Provide demonstration and training session for Owner's representative covering operation and maintenance.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
14 60 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
14 60 00 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 23 34 35 DETAIL VACUUM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 23 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
WORK INCLUDED A.
Base Bid: 1.
B.
1.3
General Contractor Provide/Manufacturer: One complete wet/dry Detailing system with two inlet positions, in accordance with the following technical specification.
Scope 1.
Intent of these specifications and drawings is to establish quality and performance level for design, materials, durability, and workmanship of the Detail System and components.
2.
Bidders must conform strictly to these specifications in their bid.
3.
The layout plans and details for the Detailing Vacuum System shown on drawings and specified herein were prepared for a system as manufactured by Clean Air Technologies Q/A Eurovac. (800)-265-3878
4.
General Contractor is responsible for providing electrical and mechanical coordination for complete and operable system.
5.
Bidder to indicate on Bid Proposal Form the Detailing Vacuum System Manufacturer that will be used on the project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative or employee of the Detailing Vacuum System manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of equipment required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing Detailing Vacuum Systems with a minimum of 5 systems in operation to this specification and that have a record of successful in-service performance for ten years or more.
C.
Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code” and are listed and labeled by UL.
D.
Design concept: The Drawings indicate the size, profiles and dimensional requirements of each Detail Vacuum System component and are based on the specific type and models indicated. ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 34 35 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Individual components by other manufacturers may be considered provided they meet the qualifications listed and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Restrict submitted material to pertinent data. For instance, do not include manufacturer’s complete catalog when pertinent information is located on a single page.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1.
2.
C. 1.5
Provide: Complete parts, operating and maintenance manual covering equipment at time of installation including, but not limited to: a.
Description of system and components.
b.
Layout drawings of piping and equipment locations specific to this project.
c.
Schematic diagrams of electrical and plumbing systems.
d.
Manufacture’s printed operating instructions.
e.
Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventative maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.
f.
List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity and local parts service source.
Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8 ½ by 11 inch format. Foldout diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Section 01 78 23.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A.
Follow requirements specified in Section 01 66 00.
B.
Additional costs resulting from substitution of products other than those specified, by model number, including drawing changes and construction, will be at the expense of the Contractor.
C.
Substitution Approval: Prior to delivery or installation, submittals for each equipment item by Equipment Identifier shall be provided in accordance with 01 33 00. Acceptance will be based on the technical requirements herein as determined by Owner and Architect.
23 34 35 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
MSCAA 14-1386-02
WARRANTY A.
Warrant work specified herein for one year from acceptance by Owner against defects in materials, function and workmanship.
B.
Warranty shall include materials and labor necessary to correct defects.
C.
Defects shall include, but not be limited to noisy, rough or substandard operation; loose, damaged, or missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of finish.
D.
Submit warranties in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
E.
All parts must be readily available by the manufacture.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver equipment in manufacturer's containers appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and in humid, dusty conditions.
B.
Indelibly label all containers, including those contained in others, on outside with item description(s) per title of this specification.
C.
Provide equipment with materials specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.
LABELING A.
Manufacturer will securely attach in a prominent location on each major item of equipment a noncorrosive nameplate showing manufacturer's name, address, model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data.
B.
All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by certified North American Underwriter (U.L, CSA, or ETL) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer's plant.
CODES AND STANDARDS A.
All work and materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of all applicable local codes; ordinances, rules and regulations of all authorities have jurisdiction. Nothing on the drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not in conformance with these rules and regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
VACUUM SYSTEM, SINGLE LANE WITH TWO DROP POSITIONS A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 34 35 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 1.
Prime Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide complete Detailing Vacuum System for cleaning the interior of fleet vehicles by the following: a.
2.
2.2
Clean Air Technologies Q/A Eurovac (800-265-3878), Model: # EIC-B10-1804200P.
Alternate manufactures: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in QUALITY INSURANCE and SUBMITTALS, equipment produced by other manufactures may be considered as equal.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A.
B.
Detail Vacuum System 1.
The System shall be a central vacuum system designed for fine cleaning of all types of fleet vehicles, vans, cars, and trucks.
2.
The system shall be capable of handling wet or dry refuse. The system is for interior detailing of seats and drivers area.
3.
The system is also capable of fine cleaning such areas as radio compartments, electronic destination sign area, wheelchair lifts, etc. without causing damage to the components.
4.
The system shall be complete with one (1) vacuum pump, pre-separator with refuse container (SS Drum type), bag filter separator, and two (2) drop positions,
5.
The two drop position stations, each with 25 ft x 1-½ inch vacuum hose, floor and seat cleaning tools, shall be fixed to the side of each drop position.
6.
A start/stop station shall be mounted within proximity of each drop position.
7.
The contractor shall provide all material, equipment, labor, services and incidentals for a complete operable system. The Memphis and Shelby County Airport Authority shall approve final layout of all equipment and related structures.
Capacities/Dimensions: 1.
2.
Vacuum Pumps a.
Motor: 1 x 10 HP, 460v/3ph/60hz
b.
Maximum airflow: 341 SCFM with 115” Max. inches of water gauge
c.
Inlet diameter: 3 inches minimum
d.
Maximum sound level: 72 dbA at 10 feet
Pre-separator a.
23 34 35 Page 4
Inlet size: 3 inch minimum ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 b. 3.
4.
Filter unit: a.
Efficiency: 99.95 percent at .2 to microns
b.
Area: 32 square feet, minimum
Drop Workstations a.
C.
Dumpster capacity: One (1) 30 gallon SS gallon drum w/ ¾ drain valve and cart
One and a half inch diameter: 25 feet minimum length
Features/Construction 1.
2.
3.
Vacuum pumps: a.
The vacuum pumps shall be a Model. VFC801A-7W or approved equal.
b.
The vacuum pumps shall be a 10 HP, capable of airflow of 250 CFM at 70 inches water gauge, rated for 20,000 hours of continuous duty operation between lubrication of bearings.
c.
A mechanical surge control vacuum relief valve shall be provided to ensure the pump receives cooling air and that the correct balance is maintained in the system. A thermal safety protector shall be incorporated at a maximum setting of 120 degrees lubrication.
d.
The vacuum pumps inlet/outlet diameter shall be a minimum of 3” inches.
e.
The pumps shall operate at 460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz power.
f.
The vacuum pump shall operate at a sound level not to exceed 78 decibels at a distance of 10 feet.
Pre-separator: a.
The Pre-Separator shall be a Clean Air Technologies Model SYS-050-54810100, or approved equal.
b.
One SS 30 gallon drum with a ¾ drain and cart shall be furnished.
Filter separator: a.
The filter unit shall be a Clear Air Technologies Model SEP-B18-040000PC, or approved equal.
b.
The filter unit shall be a two stage separator with a cyclonic primary separation trough the inlet and secondary separation through a series of bag filters.
c.
The filters are cleaned offline by manually shaking the bags. ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 34 35 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 4.
5.
Piping and Fittings: a.
Manufacture shall provide PVC DWV piping and fittings for both the main and trunk lines. Also provide all valves and adapters for a complete and operable system.
b.
Pipe diameter at the gross refuge pick-up point shall be a minimum of 3 inches.
c.
Minimum duct diameter at the main headers back to the pre-separator shall be 3 inches per run. All ducting size shall be detailed in the installation drawings. A minimum of 4500 FPM shall be maintained in the main lines to prevent settling of refuge.
d.
All joints, valves, couplings, adapters and fittings shall be leak free and grounded.
Workstations: a.
D.
Each Drop Position shall be equipped with one remote start/stop station and 25 feet minimum 1 1/2 inch hose and appropriate cleaning attachments.
Controls: 1.
Main system control panel: a.
Panel shall be a pre-wired, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 HZ NEMA 12-4 rated main electrical control panel containing motor starter for the vacuum pump and step down transformer for control 24 volt circuits,.
b.
All electrical components in the control panel are to be UL listed. The panel must be UL, ULC, ETL or CSA approved.
2.
All motors shall be protected by a circuit breaker or primary fuses and the magnetic motor starter shall be equipped with overload protection on all three phases. Motor starter shall be a heavy duty industrial type NEMA rated and UL listed.
3.
Provide a single CAD general system wiring diagram showing all internal panel wiring, external wiring between components, wire size and colors, fuse and breaker rating and terminal designation. Provide a detail installation wiring diagram for the field electrician show all devises to be wired with termination designation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Prior to beginning installation, examine area to receive the Detailing Vacuum System. Verify that critical dimensions are correct and that conditions are acceptable. 1.
B. 23 34 35 Page 6
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 C. 3.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all items listed.
INSTALLATION A.
Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman or Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect or designated representative.
B.
General: Install Detailing Vacuum System according with plans, shop drawings and to manufacturer’s instructions. 1.
3.3
C.
Vacuum pump shall be installed on 4” housekeeping pad with a perimeter or 3” beyond final dimension of equipment.
D.
Upon completion of work, finish surface shall be free of tool marks, scratches, blemishes and stains.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.4
3.5
Testing: After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specification in the presence of the Architect or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.
CLEANING A.
Touch-up damage to painted finishes.
B.
Wipe and clean equipment of any oil, grease, solvent and make ready for use.
C.
Clean area around equipment installation and remove packing and installation debris from job site.
D.
Notify Architect or designated representative for acceptance inspection.
TESTING A.
3.6
Set Detailing Vacuum System securely and accurately in place; thumb, level and properly aligned. Anchor as required for secure operation.
Testing: The system shall be considered acceptable if it can successfully clean a minimum of 15 vehicles without any failures. The manufacturer shall have a qualified representative present at site during the test period.
TRAINING A.
Obtain from technical representative, a list of Owner’s personnel to be trained on the equipment operations and maintenance. END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 34 35 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
23 34 35 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 23 51 00 FLUES AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. IFGC – International Fuel Gas Code.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS A. Furnish complete stack shop drawings for review. Drawings shall include all required accessories for a complete venting system. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
LISTED TYPE B NATURAL DRAFT VENTS A. Furnish and install a complete, factory built U.L. listed, type "B" dual wall venting system for all natural draft gas fired appliances, unless indicated otherwise. System shall include all necessary accessories, thimbles, flashing collars, cap, etc. The vent shall be constructed of an outer wall of galvanized steel, 0.018" thick G-90 for sizes 3" to 14" diameter, and 0.024" thick G-90 for sizes 16" to 30" diameter. The inner wall shall be constructed of aluminum alloy, 0.012" thick for sizes 3" to 8" diameter and 0.018" thick for sizes 10" to 30" diameter. The vent shall include an integral, annular insulating air space, 1/4" thick for sizes 3" to 6" diameter and 1/2" thick for sizes 7" to 30" diameter.
2.2
INSULATED POSITIVE PRESSURE VENT A. Double wall metal vents. B. All steel, positive pressure, double wall stack: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide all steel, positive pressure double wall vents of the following type: a. Cleaver Brooks Exhaust Solutions, model CBHLA or equivalent. C. The factory built breeching system shall be made in accordance with NFPA 211. This stack system shall be designed and installed to be gas tight. It shall be UL 1738 Listed to withstand up to 15" w.c. positive pressures. This breeching system shall be designed to compensate for all flue gas induced thermal expansions. Air space insulation between inner and outer pipe shall be 1 inch thick. Clearances to combustible materials shall be per installation instructions.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 51 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
D. The joint assembly shall be a male/female slip-type jointing with flange to flange and V-band assembly. An internal sleeve serves for readily alignment as well as long term joint seal protection from condensate, water and flue gas temperature. Non-slip type joints are not acceptable. E. The double wall stack shall have an inner gas carrying pipe of 24 gauge stainless steel as per UL1738. The outer jacket shall be 24 gauge 304 stainless steel. The materials and construction of the modular sections and accessories shall be as specified by the terms of the product’s UL Listing. F. The entire stack system from each boiler to the termination, including accessories, shall be from one manufacturer. G. The breeching and stack shall be warranted against functional failure due to defects in material and manufacturer’s workmanship for a period of 15 years from the date of delivery. H. Drawings showing the actual layout and drawn to scale shall be provided by the manufacturer. The system shall be installed as designed by the manufacturer and in accordance with the terms of the manufacturer’s 15 year warranty and in conjunction with sound engineering practice. I.
The inner diameter for breeching and stack shall be verified by the manufacturer’s computations. The computation shall be technically sound, shall follow ASHRAE calculation methods and incorporate the specific flow characteristics of the inner pipe.
J. Technical services supports. The factory built modular stack system shall be furnished by a vendor organization which assures design, installation and service coordination and provides in-warranty and post warranty unified responsibility for owner. K. All vent parts exposed to the atmosphere shall be protected by one (1) coat of corrosion and heat resistant primer and one (1) coat heat resistant paint. Paint shall be furnished and applied by installer. L. All vent supports, roof penetrations, terminations, appliance adapters, drain fittings and expansion joints required to install the vents shall be included. M. Roof penetration pieces shall be UL listed products of the chimney manufacturer. Where roof is pitched, roof penetration pieces shall be of the pitched type so that it is not necessary to provide a horizontal roof curb. Furnish approved rain cap and drain section at the base of the stack risers. N. Where exposed to weather, the outer closure band shall be sealed (with the same sealant as the inner joint) to prevent rainwater from entering the space between the inner and outer walls. O. Vents shall terminate three feet above the roof or as required by local codes. 2.3
LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS (WATER HEATERS) A. Vent shall be double wall metal vent tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.
23 51 00 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
B. Inner shall and outer jacket shall be separated by at least ½ inch airspace. Inner shell shall be ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel. Outer jacket shall be stainless steel. C. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. All flues shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with the Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. listing. Maintain recommended clearance to combustibles. B. The positive pressure vent stack and its supporting system shall resist side loads at least 1.5 times the weight per foot of piping.
3.2
GENERAL A. Maintain upward pitch on all horizontal flue sections. B. Provide thimble, flashing, and counterflashing at roof penetrations. C. Minimum two foot connector rise off of any gas fired equipment prior to horizontal offsets. D. Terminate with approved stack caps. E. Diameter shall be as indicated on the drawings, or per the manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Store delivered materials inside, out of the weather. Protect materials from accidental damage or vandalism. G. Support vent from building structure using rigid structural shapes for attachment of fixed point supports. (Plate Support Assembly). Anchor supports to structure by welding, bolting, steel expansion anchors, or concrete inserts. Size of structural shapes shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. H. Coordinate installation of dampers or fans. Dampers or fans shall be supported independently from the vent sections. Protect vent from twist or movement due to fan torque or vibration. I.
Protect incomplete vent installations by attaching temporary closures over open ends of sections.
J. Clean all vents and breechings of dust and debris prior to final connection to appliances.
END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO. 2
23 51 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
23 51 00 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 31 66 00 RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER® FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing, Contract Conditions and other Division 1 – General Requirements Sections apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY A. Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing Rammed Aggregate Pier foundations to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan and as specified herein. The aggregate piers shall be constructed by either augering a cavity or driving a hollow mandrel to the design depth and vertically ramming lifts of aggregate using the specially designed tamper head and high-energy impact densification equipment to create the compacted aggregate pier. The Rammed Aggregate Pier elements shall be in a columnar-type configuration and shall be used to produce an intermediate foundation system for support of foundation loads. B. Provision of all equipment, material, labor, and supervision to design and install Rammed Aggregate Pier elements. Design shall rely on subsurface information presented in the project geotechnical report. Layout of Rammed Aggregate Pier elements, spoil removal (as required), footing excavations, and subgrade preparation following aggregate pier installation is not included. C. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications, apply to the work in this specification.
1.3
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A.
Installers of Rammed Aggregate Pier foundation systems shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with the installation of Rammed Aggregate Pier systems and shall have completed at least 50 projects.
B.
Installers licensed by the Geopier Foundation Company, Inc. (www.geopier.com) will be accepted as approved installer.
C.
Without exception, no alternate installer will be accepted unless approved by Owner’s Engineer. Should another foundation company be approved, such contractors shall be approved by that company
D.
Installers currently approved for these works are: GeoConstructors, Inc., Leesburg, VA Geopier-Northwest, Inc., Bellevue, WA ADDENDUM NO. 2
31 66 00 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Helical Drilling, Inc. Braintree, MA Peterson Contractors, Inc., Reinbeck, IA PPI Engineering & Construction Services, Houston, TX
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
B.
Design 1.
“Control of Settlement and Uplift of Structures Using Short Aggregate Piers,” by Evert C. Lawton (Assoc. Prof., Dept. of Civil Eng., Univ. of Utah), Nathaniel S. Fox (President, Geopier Foundation Co., Inc.), and Richard L. Handy (Distinguished Prof. Emeritus, Iowa State Univ., Dept. of Civil Eng.), reprinted from IN-SITU DEEP SOIL IMPROVEMENT, Proceedings of sessions sponsored by the Geotechnical Engineering Division/ASCE in conjunction with the ASCE National Convention held October 9-13, 1994, Atlanta, Georgia.
2.
“Settlement of Structures Supported on Marginal or Inadequate Soils Stiffened with Short Aggregate Piers,” by Evert C. Lawton and Nathaniel S. Fox. Geotechnical Special Publication No. 40: Vertical and Horizontal Deformations of Foundations and Embankments, ASCE, 2, 962-974.
3.
“Behavior of Geopier®-Supported Foundation Systems during Seismic Events,” by Kord Wissmann, Evert C. Lawton, and Tom Farrell. Geopier Foundation Company, Inc. Blacksburg, VA ©1999.
Modulus Testing 1. 2.
C.
Materials and Inspection 1. 2.
D.
1.5
ASTM D 1143 - Pile Load Test Procedures ASTM D 1194 - Spread Footing Load Test
ASTM D 1241 - Aggregate Quality ASTM D 422 - Gradation of Soils
Where specifications and reference documents conflict, the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer shall make the final determination of the applicable document.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Rammed Aggregate Pier Design 1.
31 66 00 Page 2
The design of the Rammed Aggregate Pier system shall be based on the service load bearing pressure and the allowable total and differential settlement criteria of all footings indicated by the design team for support by the Rammed Aggregate Pier system. The Rammed Aggregate Pier system shall be designed to provide ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 resistance to the uplift loading demand as described in the construction documents. The Rammed Aggregate Pier system shall be designed in accordance with generally-accepted engineering practice and the methods described in Section 1 of these Specifications. The design life of the structure shall be 50 years. 2.
The design shall meet the following criteria. Maximum Allowable Bearing Pressure for Footings supported by Rammed Aggregate Pier Reinforced Soils Estimated Total Long-Term Settlement for Footings: Estimated Long-Term Differential Settlement of Adjacent Footings:
B.
1.6
7,000 psf ≤ 1-inch ≤ 1/2-inch
3.
The Rammed Aggregate Pier elements shall be designed and installed to completely penetrate existing fill.
4.
The Rammed Aggregate Pier elements shall be designed using a Rammed Aggregate Pier stiffness modulus to be verified by the results of the modulus test described in Section 5.02 of these specifications.
Design Submittal: The Installer shall submit detailed design calculations, construction drawings, and shop drawings, (the Design Submittal), for approval at least 3 week(s) prior to the beginning of construction. A detailed explanation of the design parameters for settlement calculations shall be included in the Design Submittal. Additionally, the quality control test program for Aggregate Pier system, meeting these design requirements, shall be submitted. All computer-generated calculations and drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or Province where the piers are to be built. Submittals will be submitted electronically only unless otherwise required by specific submittal instructions.
CERTIFICATIONS AND SUBMITTALS A.
Design Calculations - The Installer shall submit detailed design calculations and construction drawings prepared by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer (the Designer) for review and approval by the Owner or Owner’s Engineer. All plans shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer in the State in which the project is constructed.
B.
Professional Liability Insurance - The Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer shall have Errors and Omissions design insurance for the work. The insurance policy should provide a minimum coverage of $3 million per occurrence.
C.
Modulus Test Reports – A modulus test(s) is performed on a non-production Rammed Aggregate Pier element as required by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer to verify the design assumptions. The Installer shall furnish the General Contractor a description of the installation equipment, installation records, complete test data, analysis of the test data ADDENDUM NO. 2
31 66 00 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 and verification of the design parameter values based on the modulus test results. The report shall be prepared under direction of a Registered Professional Engineer.
D.
Daily Rammed Aggregate Pier Progress Reports – The Installer shall furnish a complete and accurate record of Rammed Aggregate Pier installation to the General Contractor. The record shall indicate the pier location, length, volume of aggregate used or number of lifts, densification forces during installation, and final elevations or depths of the base and top of piers. The record shall also indicate the type and size of the installation equipment used, and the type of aggregate used. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the General Contractor, to the Designer and to the Testing Agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Aggregate used by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Installer for pier construction shall be preapproved by the Designer and shall demonstrate suitable performance during modulus testing. Typical aggregate consists of Type 1 Grade B in accordance with ASTM D-124168, No. 57 stone, recycled concrete or other graded aggregate approved by the Designer.
B.
Potable water or other suitable source shall be used to increase aggregate moisture content where required. The General Contractor shall provide such water to the Installer.
C.
Steel used for uplift anchors shall be furnished complete with all accessories and shall be a standard product of a company regularly engaged in their manufacture. Products and accessories shall be designed to resist uplift loading demand as described in the construction documents.
D.
Minimum corrosion protection of uplift anchors shall consist of radial over-sizing the anchor bar assuming a corrosion rate of 12 mm/year, unless site specific soil testing suggests differently
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPROVED INSTALLATION PROCEDURES The following sections provide general criteria for the construction of the Rammed Aggregate Pier elements. Unless otherwise approved by the Designer, the installation method used for Rammed Aggregate Pier construction shall be that as used in the construction of the successful modulus test. A.
Augered Rammed Aggregate Pier systems – 1.
31 66 00 Page 4
Augered Rammed Aggregate Pier system shall be pre-augered using mechanical drilling or excavation equipment. ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
B.
3.2
2.
If cave-ins exceeding 10% of the lift volume occur during excavation such that the sidewalls of the hole are deemed to be unstable, steel casing shall be used to stabilize the cavity or a displacement Rammed Aggregate Pier system may be used.
3.
Aggregate shall be placed in the augered cavity in lift thicknesses as determined by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer.
4.
A specially-designed beveled tamper and high-energy impact densification apparatus shall be employed to densify lifts of aggregate during installation. The apparatus shall apply direct downward impact energy to each lift of aggregate. Compaction equipment that induces horizontal vibratory energy (such as Vibroflot equipment) is not permitted.
Displacement Rammed Aggregate Pier systems – 1.
Displacement Rammed Aggregate Pier systems shall be constructed by advancing a specially designed mandrel with a minimum 15 ton static force augmented by dynamic vertical ramming energy to the full design depth. The hollow-shaft mandrel, filled with aggregate, is incrementally raised, permitting the aggregate to be released into the cavity, and then lowered by vertically advancing and/or ramming to densify the aggregate and force it laterally into the adjacent soil. The cycle of raising and lowering the mandrel is repeated to the top of pier elevation. The cycle distance shall be determined by the Rammed Aggregate Pier designer.
2.
Special high-energy impact densification apparatus shall be employed to vertically densify the Rammed Aggregate Pier elements during installation of each constructed lift of aggregate.
3.
Densification shall be performed using a mandrel/tamper. The mandrel/tamper foot is required to adequately increase the lateral earth pressure in the matrix soil during installation. Compaction equipment that induces horizontal vibratory energy (such as Vibroflot equipment) is not permitted.
4.
Downward crowd pressure shall be applied to the mandrel during installation.
PLAN LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER ELEMENTS A.
3.3
MSCAA 14-1386-02
The as-built center of each pier shall be within 6 inches of the locations indicated on the plans. Piers installed outside of the above tolerances and deemed not acceptable shall be rebuilt at no additional expense to the Owner.
REJECTED RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER ELEMENTS A.
Rammed Aggregate Pier elements installed beyond the maximum allowable tolerances shall be abandoned and replaced with new piers, unless the Designer approves the condition or provides other remedial measures. All material and labor required to replace ADDENDUM NO. 2
31 66 00 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 rejected piers shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner, unless the cause of rejection is due to an obstruction or mislocation.
3.4
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Control Technician: The Installer shall have a full-time, on-site Control Technician to verify and report all installation procedures. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer, the General Contractor, and to the Testing Agency.
B.
Rammed Aggregate Pier Modulus Test: As required by the RAP designer, a Rammed Aggregate Pier Modulus Test(s) will be performed at locations agreed upon by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer and the Testing Agency to verify or modify Rammed Aggregate Pier designs. Modulus Test Procedures shall utilize appropriate portions of ASTM D 1143 and ASTM D 1194, as outlined in the Rammed Aggregate Pier design submittal.
C.
Rammed Aggregate Pier Uplift Test: As required by the RAP designer, a Rammed Aggregate Pier Uplift Test(s) will be performed at locations agreed upon by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer and the Testing Agency to verify or modify Rammed Aggregate Pier designs. Uplift Test Procedures shall utilize appropriate portions of ASTM D 3689, as outlined in the Rammed Aggregate Pier design submittal.
D.
Bottom Stabilization Testing (BSTs) / Crowd Stabilization Testing (CSTs): Bottom stabilization testing (BSTs) or Crowd stabilization testing (CSTs) shall be performed by the Control Technician during the installation of the modulus test pier. Additional testing as required by the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer shall be performed on selected production Rammed Aggregate Pier elements to compare results with the modulus test pier.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Independent Engineering Testing Agency (Owner’s Quality Assurance): The Rammed Aggregate Pier Installer shall provide full-time Quality Control monitoring of Rammed Aggregate Pier construction activities. The Owner or General Contractor is responsible for retaining an independent engineering testing firm to provide Quality Assurance services.
B.
Responsibilities of Independent Engineering Testing Agency
31 66 00 Page 6
1.
The Testing Agency shall monitor the modulus and uplift test pier installation and testing. The Installer shall provide and install all dial indicators and other measuring devices.
2.
The Testing Agency shall monitor the installation of Rammed Aggregate Pier elements to verify that the production installation practices are similar to those used during the installation of the modulus test elements.
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
3.6
MSCAA 14-1386-02 3.
The Testing Agency shall report any discrepancies to the Installer and General Contractor immediately.
4.
The Testing Agency shall observe the excavation, compaction and placement of the foundations as described in Section 7.05. Dynamic Cone Penetration testing may be performed to evaluate the footing bottom condition as determined by the Testing Agency.
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR A.
B.
Site Preparation and Protection 1.
The General Contractor shall locate and protect underground and aboveground utilities and other structures from damage during installation of the Rammed Aggregate Pier elements.
2.
Site grades for Rammed Aggregate Pier installation shall be within 1 foot of the top of footing elevation or finished grade elevation to minimize Rammed Aggregate Pier installation depths. Ground elevations and bottom of footing elevations shall be provided to the Rammed Aggregate Pier Installer in sufficient detail to estimate installation depth elevations to within 3 inches.
3.
The General Contractor will provide site access to the Installer, after earthwork in the area has been completed. A working surface shall be established and maintained by the General Contractor to provide wet weather protection of the subgrade and to provide access for efficient operation of the Rammed Aggregate Pier installation.
4.
Prior to, during and following Rammed Aggregate Pier installation, the General Contractor shall provide positive drainage to protect the site from wet weather and surface ponding of water.
5.
If spoils are generated by Rammed Aggregate Pier installation, spoil removal from the Rammed Aggregate Pier work area in a timely manner to prevent interruption of Rammed Aggregate Pier installation is required.
Rammed Aggregate Pier Layout The location of Rammed Aggregate Pier-supported foundations for this project, including layout of individual Rammed Aggregate Pier elements, shall be marked in the field using survey stakes or similar means at locations shown on the drawings.
C.
Contractor’s / Owner’s Independent Testing Agency (Owner’s Quality Assurance) General Contractor is responsible for acquiring an Independent Testing Agency (Quality Assurance) as required. Testing Agency roles are as described in Part 6 of this specification. The Aggregate Pier Installer will provide Quality Control services as described in Part 5 of this specification.
D.
Excavations of Obstructions ADDENDUM NO. 2
31 66 00 Page 7
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
1.
Should any obstruction be encountered during Rammed Aggregate Pier installation, the General Contractor shall be responsible for promptly removing such obstruction, or the pier shall be relocated or abandoned. Obstructions include, but are not limited to, boulders, timbers, concrete, bricks, utility lines, etc., which shall prevent placing the piers to the required depth, or shall cause the pier to drift from the required location.
2.
Dense natural rock or weathered rock layers shall not be deemed obstructions, and piers may be terminated short of design lengths on such materials.
E.
Utility Excavations: The General Contractor shall coordinate all excavations made subsequent to Rammed Aggregate Pier installations so that excavations do not encroach on the piers as shown in the Rammed Aggregate Pier construction drawings. Protection of completed Rammed Aggregate Pier elements is the responsibility of the General Contractor. In the event that utility excavations are required in close proximity to the installed Rammed Aggregate Pier elements, the General Contractor shall contact the Rammed Aggregate Pier Designer immediately to develop construction solutions to minimize impacts on the installed Aggregate Pier elements.
F.
Footing Bottoms 1.
Excavation and surface compaction of all footings shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
2.
Foundation excavations to expose the tops of Rammed Aggregate Pier elements shall be made in a workman-like manner, and shall be protected until concrete placement, with procedures and equipment best suited to (1) avoid exposure to water, (2) prevent softening of the matrix soil between and around the Rammed Aggregate Pier elements before pouring structural concrete, and (3) achieve direct and firm contact between the dense, undisturbed Rammed Aggregate Pier elements and the concrete footing.
3.
All excavations for footing bottoms supported by Rammed Aggregate Pier foundations shall be prepared in the following manner by the General Contractor. Recommended procedures for achieving these goals are to: a) Limit over-excavation below the bottom of the footing to 3-inches (including disturbance from the teeth of the excavation equipment). b) Compaction of surface soil and top of Rammed Aggregate Pier elements shall be prepared using a motorized impact compactor (“Wacker Packer,” “Jumping Jack,” or similar). Sled-type tamping devices shall only be used in granular soils and when approved by the designer. Loose or soft surficial soil over the entire footing bottom shall be recompacted or removed, respectively. The surface of the aggregate pier shall be recompacted prior to completing footing bottom preparation. c) Place footing concrete immediately after footing excavation is made and approved, preferably the same day as the excavation. Footing concrete must be placed on the same day if the footing is bearing on moisture-
31 66 00 Page 8
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 sensitive soils. If same day placement of footing concrete is not possible, open excavations shall be protected from surface water accumulation. A lean concrete mud-mat may be used to accomplish this. Other methods must be pre-approved by the Designer. 4.
The following criteria shall apply, and a written inspection report sealed by the project Testing Agency shall be furnished to the Installer to confirm: a) That water (which may soften the unconfined matrix soil between and around the Rammed Aggregate Pier elements, and may have detrimental effects on the supporting capability of the Rammed Aggregate Pier reinforced subgrade) has not been allowed to pond in the footing excavation at any time. b) That all Rammed Aggregate Pier elements designed for each footing have been exposed in the footing excavation. c) That immediately before footing construction, the tops of Rammed Aggregate Pier elements exposed in each footing excavation have been inspected and recompacted as necessary with mechanical compaction equipment. d) That no excavations or drilled shafts (elevator, etc) have been made after installation of Aggregate Pier elements within the excavation limits described in the Rammed Aggregate Pier construction drawings, without the written approval of the Installer or Designer.
E.
Failure to provide the above inspection and certification by the Testing Agency, which is beyond the responsibility of the Rammed Aggregate Pier Installer, may void any written or implied warranty on the performance of the Rammed Aggregate Pier system. END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
31 66 00 Page 9
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
31 66 00 Page 10
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 SECTION 41 34 23 PAINT BOOTH
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.4
Provide modular paint booth complete as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the work.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Division 5 Section “Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications”.
B.
Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.
C.
Division 23 - HVAC; mechanical services and connections.
D.
Division 26 - Electrical; electrical power service and wiring connections.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data, including: 1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Installation methods.
B.
Manufacturer’s detailed shop drawings, including exploded view of installation drawings to facilitate assembly. Shop drawings shall indicate modifications required to address seismic requirements.
C.
Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions and recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
C.
Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct meeting to verify project requirements, substrate ADDENDUM NO. 2
41 34 23 Page 1
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 conditions, utility connections, manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.7
SEQUENCING A.
Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
B.
Ensure that related materials and systems are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.9
1.10
Do not deliver materials or assemblies to site until installation spaces are ready to receive units.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. CODE COMPLIANCE
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 33.
B.
Comply with Chapter 24 of the International Fire Code (IFC).
C.
OSHA 1910.107 - Spray finishing using flammable and combustible materials.
D.
Comply with codes and regulations of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
E.
The paint booth is not required to be listed as an assembly; however, the assembly includes components require UL (Underwriters Laboratory) listing or ETL testing.
EQUIPMENT LIMITATIONS A. The specified paint booth is not approved for outdoor applications. B. The specified paint booth is not approved for use in seismic areas, without structural analysis and modifications required to address seismic requirements. Comply with Paragraph 1.4.B. (See Addendum Item No. C. Ductwork supports shall be provided by others.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
41 34 23 Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 2.1
MANUFACTURERS – PAINT BOOTH A.
2.2
MSCAA 14-1386-02
Basis-of-Design: Products of Global Finishing Solutions are specified. Equivalent products of other manufacturers are acceptable subject to Architect and Owner approval. Submit substitution requests in accordance with applicable Division 1 – General Requirements section.
PAINT BOOTH A.
Type/Model: “Performer ES Booth” semi-downdraft paint booth. Global Finishing Solutions Model# PFSMN-241409 Cabin.
B.
Working Dimensions: 14’ wide x 9’ high x 24’ long.
C.
Approximate Overall Dimensions: 15’-1” x 11’-2” x 24’-4”.
D.
Construction: Single skin galvanized steel sheets with C-channel stiffeners combined with nuts and bolts construction for rigidity, and exterior flanges. Prove necessary assembly hardware including all required bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and caulking for a complete assembly.
E.
Light Fixtures: 48'' 4-Tube, 265 mA, 32-watt T8 ballast, dual voltage-120/277 with LED color corrected tubes. Lights are Class 4-Tube, Division 2 rated. Lights are ETL and ETLC listed and are also listed for locations having deposits of readily combustible paint residue. Instant start (starting temperature at 0 degrees F.)
F.
T-8 electronic ballast with twist in style lamp holders.
G.
Access: Front/inside access lamp replacement.
H.
Interlock: Interlock switch to disable painting operations when light access door is opened. 1.
Exhaust: 3 HP exhaust motor with belt-driven 30”, tube axial exhaust fan featuring a continuously welded galvanized housing, cast aluminum propeller and totally enclosed belt guard that provides protection from the rotating pulley.
2.
Fan Bearings: Self-aligning bearings with a fatigue life in access of 40,000 hours at maximum operating speed.
3.
Sound Levels: Performance calculated in accordance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standards.
4.
Exhaust Ductwork: 30'' diameter exhaust hammer style ductwork for a 15 ft. high flat roof.
5.
Operation and Safety Equipment: a)
Solenoid Valve: 3-way solenoid valve to prevent spraying in booth when
ADDENDUM NO. 2
41 34 23 Page 3
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02 fans are off or light tube access door is opened, in compliance with NFPA 33.
b)
2.3
I.
Particulate Removal: Equipment is designed expressly for the removal of particulate matter only. Reduction of "volatile organic compounds" requires either coating reformulation or optional, additional equipment.
J.
Doors and Windows: Manufacturer’s standard metal roll up door with electric motor operation and control. Personnel access door with panic latch and 18” x 48” clear tempered glass observation window.
CONTROLS A.
U.L. industrial listed pre-wired independent electrical control panel (480V, 3 PH, 3 Wire) with single point connection for wiring with NEMA-1 rated enclosure. Control components include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.4
Manometer: Dwyer Mark II Manometer to monitor paint overspray build up on exhaust filters as required by NFPA-33.
Non-fused disconnect Magnetic motor starter Motor fuse protection Lighting contactor Lighting fuse protection Terminal strips for field wiring System operating lights
ACCESSORIES/TOOLS: ITEMS LISTED BELOW ARE OWNER PURCHASED. A.
Paint Booth Parts Hanger System
B.
Paint Booth Tool Cabinet
C.
Rotating Booth Access Table
D.
Four (4) position Spray Gun Holder
E.
Paint Spray Guns
F.
Paint Spray Gun Extensions
G.
Paint Shakers/Mixers
H.
High Pressure Liquid Spray Package
I.
Mid-Pressure Liquid Spray Package
41 34 23 Page 4
ADDENDUM NO. 2
02/07/18 J.
MSCAA 14-1386-02 Low Pressure Liquid Spray Package
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin installation until openings and substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify exact location for installation.
C.
Verify that rough openings and substrates are ready to receive work.
D.
If opening and substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
3.4
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
Install paint booth in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Seal joints and around openings.
C.
Upon completion of installation operate unit and make necessary adjustments.
D.
Connect mechanical services as specified under Division 23.
E.
Connect electrical services as specified under Division 26
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed paint booth from damage until completion and acceptance of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair damages that occur prior to acceptance.
END OF SECTION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
41 34 23 Page 5
02/07/18
MSCAA 14-1386-02
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.
41 34 23 Page 6
ADDENDUM NO. 2